Pioneer Elite SC-25 Bruksanvisning
Läs nedan 📖 manual på svenska för Pioneer Elite SC-25 (154 sidor) i kategorin mottagare. Denna guide var användbar för 3 personer och betygsatt med 4.5 stjärnor i genomsnitt av 2 användare
Sida 1/154

Operating Instructions
audio/video multi-channel receiver

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Product Name: AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER
Model Number: SC-27 / SC-25
Responsible Party Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC.
Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST. LONG BEACH, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-421-1404
VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 20 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
20 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
IMPORTANT NOTICE
THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS LOCATED IN THE REAR.
PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCLOSED WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SECURE AREA.
THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY.
D1-4-2-6-1*_A1_En
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
D8-10-1-2_A1_En
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
D8-10-1-3_A1_En
Information to User
Alterations or modifications carried out without
appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s
right to operate the equipment.
D8-10-2_A1_En
CAUTION
This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded
cables and connectors are used to connect the unit
to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic
interference with electric appliances such as radios
and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors
for connections.
D8-10-3a_A1_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En
CAUTION
The switch on this unit will not STANDBY/ON
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En

Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce
heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an
electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Only use attachments/accessories specified by
the manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with
the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms
or when unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has
been damaged in any way, such as power-supply
cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled
or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
P1-4-2-2_En
11)
12)
13)
14)
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires
repair will be charged for even during the warranty
period.
K041_En
WARNING
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
or 120 V) written on the rear panel.
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filled
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
or moisture.
D3-4-2-1-3_B_En
CAUTION
To prevent fire hazard, the Class 2 Wiring Cable
should be used for connection with speaker, and
should be routed away from hazards to avoid
damage to the insulation of the cable.
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
equipment.
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT
D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En

WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or
cords associated with accessories sold with the
product will expose you to chemicals listed on
proposition 65 known to the State of California and
other governmental entities to cause cancer and
birth defect or other reproductive harm.
D36-P4_A_En
Wash hands after handling
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En

5
en
Contents
Flow of settings on the receiver 8
01 Before you start
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Checking what’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . 11
02 Controls and displays
Remote control (In case of SC-27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remote control (In case of SC-25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
03 Connecting your equipment
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Determining the speakers’ application . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Other speaker connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Placing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Some tips for improving sound quality . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Installing your speaker system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Bi-amping your speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Selecting the Surr Back system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ZONE 2 setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Speaker B setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Bi-Amping setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
About the audio connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting your TV and playback components . . . . . 29
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Connecting your DVD player with
no HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input . . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and
other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
other set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . 34
Connecting other audio components. . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
About the WMA9 Pro decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting additional amplifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Connecting AM/FM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Connecting external antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connecting an XM Radio tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connecting a SiriusConnect™ tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
MULTI-ZONE setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Making MULTI-ZONE connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting an IR receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Operating other Pioneer components with
this unit’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Switching components on and off using
the 12 volt trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 41
Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to
the front panel input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Connecting an iPod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Plugging in the receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
04 Basic Setup
Changing the OSD display language
(OSD Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control). . . . . . . . . 46
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . 48
The Input Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 49
05 Basic playback
Playing a source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Playing a source with HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . 50
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 51
Playing an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod . . . . . . . 51
Playing a USB device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Playing back audio files stored on a USB
memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Playing back photo files stored on a USB
memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
About playable file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Listening to the radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Improving FM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using Neural THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Listening to Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Listening to XM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using XM HD Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using the XM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Listening to SIRIUS Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using the SIRIUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

6
en
06 Listening to your system
Auto playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Listening in surround sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Using Stream Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 66
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting the Up Mix function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Choosing the input signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Better sound using Phase Control and
Full Band Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY
inputs
Enjoying the Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Features of Home Media Gallery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Steps to enjoy the Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Playing back audio files on the network and
listening to Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connecting to the network through LAN interface . . . 72
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
About network playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Windows Media Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Windows Media DRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
DLNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Content playable over a network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
About playback behavior over a network . . . . . . . . . 73
Authorizing this receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playback with Home Media Gallery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Playing back audio files stored on components on
the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Listening to Internet radio stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Listening to Rhapsody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Listening to Sirius Internet Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Listening to Neural Music Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Playing back your favorite songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
About playable file formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Advanced operations for Internet radio. . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Saving Internet radio stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Retrieving saved Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . 79
Setting up the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Checking the network settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Checking about the Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
08 KURO LINK
Making the KURO LINK connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Cautions on the KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . 84
About connections with a product of a different
brand that supports the KURO LINK function . . . . . 85
KURO LINK Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Setting the PQLS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
09 Using other functions
Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
About the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter)
(SC-27 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Switching the HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
10 Controlling the rest of your system
(In case of SC-27)
Operating multiple receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Setting the remote to control other components . . . . 96
Selecting preset codes directly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Programming signals from other remote controls . . . 97
Erasing one of the remote control button settings . . . 98
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Confirming preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Renaming input function names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Direct function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Programming a multi-operation or
a shutdown sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Using multi operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Using System off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Controls for TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
10 Controlling the rest of your system
(In case of SC-25)
Operating multiple receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Setting the remote to control other components . . . 103
Selecting preset codes directly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Programming signals from other remote controls
. . . 104
Erasing the remote control button settings . . . . . . . 104
Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Programming a multi-operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Using multi operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Using System off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Default preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Controls the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

7
en
11 The Advanced MCACC menu
Making receiver settings from the Advanced
MCACC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fine Speaker Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . . . . . 115
Precision Distance (SC-27 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Acoustic Cal EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Output PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Renaming MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Copying MCACC preset data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Clearing MCACC presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
12 The system and the other setup
Making receiver settings from the System
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
The Other Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Power ON Level Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Volume Limit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Remote Control Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Flicker Reduction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
13 Additional information
Speaker Setting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Positional relationship between speakers and
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . 137
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Important information regarding the HDMI
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
HOME MEDIA GALLERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
About status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
XM radio messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
SIRIUS radio messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Dolby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . 145
About iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
About Neural – THX Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
About SIRIUS and XM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
About FLAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
FLAC Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with
different input signal formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cleaning the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

8
en
Flow of settings on the receiver
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used easily
after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.
The colors of the steps indicate the following:
Required setting item
Setting to be made as necessary
1 Before you start
• Checking what’s in the box (page 10)
• Loading the batteries (page 11)
2
Determining the speakers’ application (page
22)
• 7.1ch surround connection
• 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping connection
• 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection
• 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection
3 Connecting the speakers
• Placing the speakers (page 23)
• Connecting the speakers (page 24)
• Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections
(page 25)
• Bi-amping your speakers (page 26)
4 Connecting the components
• About the audio connection (page 27)
• About the video converter (page 28)
• Connecting your TV and playback components
(page 29)
• Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 36)
• Plugging in the receiver (page 44)
5 Power On
6 Changing the OSD display language (OSD
Language) (page 45)
7
Surround back speaker setting (page 124)
8 MCACC speaker settings
• Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) (page 46)
9 The Input Setup menu (page 48)
(When using connections other than the
recommended connections)
10 Basic playback (page 50)
11 Switching the HDMI output (page 94)
12 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired
• Using the various listening modes
• Using surround back channel processing (page 66)
• Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band
Phase Control (page 68)
• Measure the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/
FRONT ALIGN) (page 110)
• Change the channel level while listening (Tip on
page 126)
• Switches on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Sound
retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page 88)
• Setting the PQLS function (page 86)
• Setting the Audio options (Tone, Loudness or
Sound delay, etc.) (page 88)
• Setting the Video options (page 90)
13 Other optional adjustments and settings
• KURO LINK Setup (page 85)
• The Advanced MCACC menu (page 109)
• The system and the other setup (page 123)
14 Making maximum use of the remote control
• SC-27 – Operating multiple receivers (page 96)
• SC-27 – Setting the remote to control other
components (page 96)
• SC-25 – Operating multiple receivers (page 103)
• SC-25 – Setting the remote to control other
components (page 103)

Before you start 01
9
en
Chapter 1:
Before you start
Our philosophy
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater
listening experience as close as possible to the vision of
the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they
created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing
on three important steps:
1 Achieving the highest possible sound quality
2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration
according to any listening area
3 Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world-
class studio engineers
1
1 With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has
been designated AIR Studios Monitor:
Features
• Direct Energy HD Amplifier
Through a collaboration, Pioneer and ICEpower have
jointly development a unique class D amplifier called a
“Direct Energy High Fidelity Class D (HD) amplifier”. This
new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding
performance (high output of 770 W (SC-27)/700 W
(SC-25) simultaneous) with high sound quality and
reproduces the latest in multi-channel digital contents.
• Easy setup using Advanced MCACC
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This
innovative technology measures the reverb
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to
customize your system calibration with the help of a
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen or
using computer. With the additional benefits of
numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave
control and microphone measurements from a series of
reference points, your home theater experience can be
truly customized for optimal surround sound.
• THX certified design (In case of SC-27)
This receiver bears the THX Ultra2 Plus logo, which
means it has passed a rigorous series of quality and
performance tests covering every aspect of the product.
This includes testing of pre-amplifier and power amplifier
performance and operation, and hundreds of other
parameters in both the digital and analog domain,
making your home theater experience as faithful as
possible to what the director intended.
• THX certified design (In case of SC-25)
This receiver bears the THX Select2 Plus logo, which
means it has passed a rigorous series of quality and
performance tests covering every aspect of the product.
This includes testing of pre-amplifier and power amplifier
performance and operation, and hundreds of other
parameters in both the digital and analog domain,
making your home theater experience as faithful as
possible to what the director intended.
• Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD
Master Audio
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound
right into your home with up to six channels of surround
sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)
channel for deep, realistic sound effects.
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders
not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby
Surround sources, but will also generate convincing
surround sound for any stereo source.
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you
can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and
DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,
which are designed for the next-generation high-
definition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD,
support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer
rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is
available only when signals are delivered to this receiver
as primary audio).
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners
without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.
• Phase Control
The Phase Control technology incorporated into this
receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction
through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound
image at your listening position.
• Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature analyzes the
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers
connected and corrects the phase distortion to the
flattened frequency-phase characteristics. This

Before you start
01
10
en
correction minimizes the group delay of the middle- and
low-frequency ranges against the high-frequency range
and improves the frequency-phase characteristics
across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-
phase characteristics between channels ensure better
surround sound integration.
• Sound Retriever
The Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to
restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left
over after compression. This helps bring CD quality
sound back to WMA and MP3 audio files and achieves a
richer sense of presence when playing Dolby Digital, DTS
or WMA 9 Pro audio formats recorded in multiple
channels on DVDs and other discs.
• HOME MEDIA GALLERY
This receiver can play back contents stored on your
computer when your computer is connected to the LAN
terminal of this receiver. Also, you can listen to the
Internet radio stations.
• Front Stage Surround Advance
With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can
enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using
only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality
of the original sound.
• Auto Level Control
When the source is played in Auto level control mode
(ALC), this receiver automatically equalizes the playback
sound level according to the variation in recording levels.
• Optimum Surround
All movie creators do their best to express movie’s story
and use sounds 50 % to achieve it. They assume that the
finally mixed sounds should be best sound balance at
movie theaters that can perform a big sound. However, in
many cases, such a big sound is actually too much for
customer’s Home Theater environment, smaller volume
is normally used.
In such case, there is possibility that the sound balance
is changed/depressed compared to movie theaters. The
volume is smaller, the possibility is higher. In short,
smaller volume can NOT tell us stories properly as the
same as creator’s intention.
• HDMI and digital video conversion
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video
format, providing you with high-definition digital video/
audio via a single cable.
High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby
TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also
compatible with the Deep Color and x.v.Color feature
(x.v.Color is trademarks of Sony Corporation). You can
operate this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer
component that supports the KURO LINK function by
connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI.
Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver
makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and
analog video signals being input are converted and
output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.
• XM and SIRIUS Ready
With the XM and SIRIUS Radio terminals, you’ll be up
and running in no time. This receiver’s enhanced
compatibility makes XM HD Surround playback as well
as on-screen control of your XM and SIRIUS Radio an
added possibility.
• iPod/iPhone and USB Ready
This receiver has the terminals for connecting an iPod/
iPhone unit and a USB mass storage device.
The iPod terminal is ready for handling digital audio and
video, and this receiver’s enhanced compatibility makes
on-screen control of your iPod an added possibility.
The USB terminal allows you to listen to two-channel
audio from a USB mass storage device connected to this
receiver.
Checking what’s in the box
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied
accessories:
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))
• Remote control unit
• Dry cell batteries x2
• AM loop antenna
• FM wire antenna
• iPod cable
• Power cord
• Warranty card
• These operating instructions
Installing the receiver
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a
level and stable surface.
Don’t install it on the following places:
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.
– in direct sunlight
– in damp or wet areas
– in extremely hot or cold areas
– in places where there is vibration or other movement
– in places that are very dusty
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)
• Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel while the
power is turned on. The bottom panel gets hot when
the power is on, and touching it could cause burns.

Before you start 01
11
en
Loading the batteries
In case of SC-27
In case of SC-25
CAUTION
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
• Never use new and old batteries together.
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries
properly according to the marks in the battery case.
• Batteries with the same shape may have different
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
• WARNING
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
Operating range of remote control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
• There are obstacles between the remote control and
the receiver’s remote sensor.
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the
remote sensor.
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting
infrared rays.
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another
infrared remote control unit.
7 m (23 ft.)
30°
30°

Controls and displays
02
12
en
Chapter 2:
Controls and displays
Remote control (In case of SC-27)
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according
to component control using the following system:
• White – Receiver control, TV Control
• Blue – Other controls
1 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch
Switch to perform operations in the main zone, ZONE 2
and ZONE 3 (page 91).
2 RECEIVER
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
3
MULTI OPERATION
Use this button to perform multi operations (page 99).
4 Input function buttons
Press to select control of other components (see
Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-27) on
page 96).
5
INPUT SELECT
Use to select the input function (page 50).
6 Character display (LCD)
This display shows information when transmitting
control signals.
The following commands are shown when you’re setting
the remote to control other components (see Controlling
the rest of your system (In case of SC-27) on page 96):
SETUP – Indicates the setup mode, from which you
choose the options below.
PRESET – See Selecting preset codes directly on
page 96.
LEARNING – See Programming signals from other
remote controls on page 97.
MULTI OP – See Multi Operation and System Off on
page 99.
SYS OFF – See Multi Operation and System Off on
page 99.
DIRECT F – See Direct function on page 99.
RENAME – See Renaming input function names on
page 98.
ERASE – See Erasing one of the remote control button
settings on page 98.
RESET – See Resetting the remote control presets on
page 98.
READ ID – See Confirming preset codes on page 98.
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
ZONE2
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
MUTE
PGM MENU
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
XM
SIRIUS
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT
CLR
SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
ENTER
CLASS
DISP
CH
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
ENTER
RETURN
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
11
5
6
12
13
14
15
16
17

Controls and displays 02
13
en
RC MODE – See Operating multiple receivers on
page 96.
7
TV CONTROL
buttons
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to
the TV operation selector switch. Thus if you only have
one TV to hook up to this system assign it to the TV
operation selector switch (see page 96 or page 103 for
more on this).
– Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.
VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.
INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.
CH +/– – Use to select channels.
MUTE – Use to mute the sound or cancel the mute
mode.
8 Tuner/component control buttons/
HOME MENU
These button controls can be accessed after you have
selected the corresponding input function button (DVD,
DVR, TV, etc.). The BAND and T.EDIT tuner controls are
explained on page 56.
Set the remote control operation selector switch to
RECEIVER to access the following controls:
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio
options (page 88).
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video
options (page 90).
HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu
(pages 45, 48, 85, 109, 118, 121, 123 and 128).
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).
9
///
(
TUNE
/
PRESET
) /
ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround
sound system (see page 109) and the Audio or Video
options (page 88 or 90). Also used to control DVD menus/
options and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player.
Use TUNE / to find radio frequencies and use
PRESET / to find preset stations (page 56).
10 Component control buttons
The main buttons ( , , etc.) are used to control a
component after you have selected it using the input
function buttons.
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after
you have selected the corresponding input function
button (for example DVD, DVR or TV). These buttons also
function as described below.
Press TUNER first to access:
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak, then
switching to mono will improve the sound quality
(page 56). NOISE CUT MODE 1 to 2 can be selected
when receiving AM broadcasts.
Set the remote control operation selector switch to
RECEIVER first to access:
STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings
(page 94).
PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase Control
or Full Band Phase Control (page 68).
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,
then use / to adjust the level (page 126).
PQLS – Press to select PQLS setting (page 86).
AUTO/ALC/DIRECT –
Switches between Auto
Surround
(page 61)
, Auto level control, Optimum
Surround mode and Stream Direct mode
(page 65).
STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and
Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 65).
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to
switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and
Neo:6 options (page 62).
ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various
surround modes (page 63).
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode
(page 63).
11 Number buttons and other receiver/component
controls
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio
frequency (page 56) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.
ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV.
After set the remote control operation switch to
RECEIVER:
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 68).
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and
select the amount of time before sleep (page 93).
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 93).
A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog
input signal to prevent distortion (page 93).
SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back
channel mode (page 66).
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets
(page 67).
HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output terminal
(page 94).
Press TUNER first to access:
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio
station directly using the number buttons (page 56).
CLASS – Switches between the seven banks (classes)
of radio station presets (page 56).
12
SOURCE
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the
receiver (see page 96 for more on this).

Controls and displays
02
14
en
13 Remote control illumination button
Press to turn on/off the illumination of some of the
buttons and the LCD light. 1
14 Remote control operation selector switch
Set to RECEIVER to operate the receiver, TV or SOURCE
to operate the TV or the source device.
When this switch is set to RECEIVER, the receiver can be
controlled (used to select the white commands above the
number buttons (A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this switch to set
up surround sound.
15
VOL +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
16
MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
17
AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on DVD or
BD discs.
DISP – Switches between named station presets and
radio frequencies.
CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVD/DVR units.
Note
1 Press and hold in the remote control illumination button for 5 seconds to change the illumination mode 1 or 2. When set to LIGHT M2 (default),
the illumination only lights when the remote control illumination button is pressed. When switched to LIGHT M1, the illumination lights
whenever buttons are operated. Setting LIGHT M1 will shorten the service life of the batteries.

Controls and displays 02
15
en
Remote control (In case of SC-25)
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according
to component control using the following system:
• White – Receiver control, TV Control
• Blue – Other controls
1
RECEIVER
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
2 Input function buttons
Press to select control of other components (see
Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-25) on
page 103).
3 Number buttons and other receiver/component
controls
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio
frequency (page 56) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.
ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV.
Press first to access:
INPUT SELECT – Use to select the input function
(page 50).
HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output terminal
(page 94).
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 68).
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets
(page 67).
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and
select the amount of time before sleep (page 93).
SBch
– Use to select the surround back/virtual surround
back channel mode
(page 66)
.
A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog
input signal to prevent distortion (page 93).
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 93).
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,
then use / to adjust the level (page 126).
Press TUNER first to access:
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio
station directly using the number buttons (page 56).
CLASS – Switches between the seven banks (classes)
of radio station presets (page 56).
4
TV CONTROL
buttons
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to
the TV operation selector switch. Thus if you only have
one TV to hook up to this system assign it to the TV
operation selector switch (see page 106 for more on this).
– Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.
INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.
CH +/– – Use to select channels.
VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.
5 Tuner/component control buttons/
HOME MENU
These button controls can be accessed after you have
selected the corresponding input function button (DVD,
DVR, TV T.EDIT, etc.). The BAND and tuner controls are
explained on page 56 and page 57.
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
INPUT
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
MUTE
RETURN
iPod CTRL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VOL
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO
MENU
ADV SURR
CH
TV CONTROL
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
RECEIVER
SOURCE
ENTER
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
1
2
3
7
8
9
10
11
4
5
6
13
12
14
15
16
17
RECEIVER

Controls and displays
02
16
en
Press first to access:
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio
options (page 88).
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video
options (page 90).
HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu
(pages 45, 48, 85, 109, 118, 121, 123 and 128).
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).
6
///
(
TUNE
/
PRESET
) /
ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround
sound system (see page 109) and the Audio or Video
options (page 88 or 90). Also used to control DVD menus/
options and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player.
Use TUNE/ to find radio frequencies and use PRESET
/ to find preset stations (page 56).
7 Component/Receiver control buttons
The main buttons ( , , etc.) are used to control a
component after you have selected it using the input
function buttons.
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after
you have selected the corresponding input function
button (for example DVD, DVR or TV). These buttons also
function as described below.
Press TUNER first to access:
MPX
– Switches between stereo and mono reception
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak, then switching
to mono will improve the sound quality
(page 56)
.
NOISE CUT MODE 1
or
2
can be selected when this
unit is receiving AM broadcasts.
Press first to access:
AUTO/ALC/DIRECT –
Switches between Auto
Surround
(page 61)
, Auto level control, Optimum
Surround mode and Stream Direct mode
(page 65).
STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and
Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 65).
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to
switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and
Neo:6 options (page 62).
ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various
surround modes (page 63).
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode
(page 63).
PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase Control
or Full Band Phase Control (page 68).
STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings
(page 94).
PQLS – Press to select PQLS setting (page 86).
8
AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on DVD or
BD discs.
DISP – Switches between named station presets and
radio frequencies.
CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVD/DVR units.
9
REMOTE SETUP
Use to input the preset code when making remote
control settings and to set the remote control mode
(page 103).
10
TV CTRL
Use this button to set preset code of your TV’s
manufacturer when controlling TV (see Selecting preset
codes directly on page 103 for more on this).
11
MULTI-ZONE
operation selector switch
Switch to perform operations in the main zone, ZONE 2
and ZONE 3 (page 92).
12 Remote control LED
Lights when a command is sent from the remote control
(page 103).
13
SOURCE
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the
receiver (see page 103 for more on this).
14
MASTER VOLUME +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
15
MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
16
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to
select the white commands above the number buttons
(A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this button to set up surround
sound.
17
Press to turn on/off the illumination of some of the
buttons.
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
RECEIVER

Controls and displays 02
17
en
Front panel
1
STANDBY/ON
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power
indicator lights when the receiver is on.
When the KURO LINK function is set to ON, the power
indicator lights when the power is in standby.
2
INPUT SELECTOR
dial
Use to select an input function (page 50).
3
PHASE CONTROL
indicator
– Lights to indicate
Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control is selected
(page 68).
ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights when EQ is
set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu
(page 88).
PQLS indicator – Lights when the PQLS feature is
active (page 86).
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-
equipped component; lights when the component is
connected (page 29).
4 Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control (see
Operating range of remote control unit on page 11).
5 Character display
See Display on page 18.
6
MASTER VOLUME
dial
7 Front panel controls
To access the front panel controls, push gently on the
lower third portion of the panel with your finger.
8
AUDIO PARAMETER
Use to access the Audio options (page 88).
9
VIDEO PARAMETER
Use to access the Video options (page 90).
STANDBY/ON
INPUT
SELECTOR
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANCED
MCACC PQLS HDMI
MASTER
VOLUME
PHONES
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
ON/OFF
MCACC
SETUP MIC
PARAMETER
ENTER
(TUNE)
(TUNE)
(PRESET)(PRESET)
AUDIO VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
USBHDMI 4
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREOBAND
HOME MENU RETURN
1
7
2 3
8
16 17
9 11 12 151410
4 5 6
13
20 2118 19

Controls and displays
02
18
en
10
///
(
TUNE
/
PRESET
) /
ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your HOME
MENU. Use TUNE / to find radio frequencies and use
PRESET / to find preset stations (page 56).
11
TUNER EDIT
Use with ////ENTER to memorize and name
stations for recall (page 56).
12
BAND
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 56).
13 Listening mode buttons
AUTO SURR/ /ALC STREAM DIRECT –
Switches
between Auto Surround
(page 61)
, Auto level control,
Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode
(page 65)
.
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening
mode (page 63).
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard
decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 62).
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between
the various surround modes (page 63).
STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and
Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 65).
14
MULTI-ZONE
controls
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-
ZONE setup on page 38) use these controls to control the
sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE
controls on page 91).
15
SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker system (page 91).
16
HOME MENU
Press to access the Home Menu (pages 45, 48, 85, 109,
118, 121, 123 and 128).
17
RETURN
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.
18 HDMI input connector
Use for connection to compatible HDMI device (Video
camera, etc.). See Connecting an HDMI-equipped
component to the front panel input on page 42.
19
iPod/iPhone/USB
terminals
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio and video
source, or connect a USB device for audio and photo
playback (page 43).
20
MCACC SETUP MIC
jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone (page 46).
21
PHONES
jack
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.
Display
1
SIGNAL
indicators
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input
signal automatically (page 68).
2 Program format indicators
Light to indicate the channels being input when PCM
signals are being input. They do not indicate the audio
signals being output from the receiver.
L/R – Left front/Right front channel
C – Center channel
SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround channel
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) indicators light
when an LFE signal is being input)
XL XR/ – Two channels other than the ones above
XC – Either one channel other than the ones above, the mono
surround channel or matrix encode flag
3 Digital format indicators
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format
is detected.
4
S.RTRV
Lights when the Sound Retriever function is
active
(page 88)
.
PCM
HDMI
DIGITAL
ANALOG
L C R
SL SR
XL XR
XC
LFE
AUTO
DIGITAL PLUS
AUTO SURROUND
STREAM DIRECT
PROLOGIC
x
Neo:6
THX ADV.SURROUND
STEREO STANDARD
SP
AB
SLEEP
DSD PCM
DTS HD ES 96/24
MSTR
S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX
OVER
MONO
dB
2
MULTI-ZONE
STEREOTrueHD WMA9Pro
FULL BAND
TUNED
PQLS
ALC
ATT
2
2
USBHMG
VIDEO
TV
DVD
HDMI
DVR
BD
CD
TUNER
CD-R
PHONO iPod
SIRIUS
[ 2 ]
XM
[ 3 ] [ 4 ]
21 3
11
7 8
9
65
1210 13 14 15 16
22 2318 19 20 21
17
8
4

Controls and displays 02
19
en
5
MULTI-ZONE
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 91).
6
DSD PCM
–
Light during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to
PCM conversion with SACDs.
PCM – Lights during playback of PCM signals.
7
FULL BAND
Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on
(page 69).
8 Listening mode indicators
AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto Surround
feature is switched on (page 61).
ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level control) mode
is selected (page 65).
STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is
selected (page 65).
ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the
Advanced Surround modes has been selected
(page 63).
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched
on (page 64).
STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard
Surround modes is switched on (page 62).
THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is
selected (page 63).
9 (
PHASE CONTROL
)
Lights when the Phase Control or Full Band Phase
Control is switched on (page 68).
10 Analog signal indicators
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal
(page 93).
11
UP MIX
Lights when the Up Mix is switched on (page 67).
12 Tuner indicators
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.
STEREO –
Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being
received in auto stereo mode.
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using
MPX.
13
SOUND
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or tone
controls feature is selected (page 88).
Lights when Dialog Enhancement is switched on.
14
Lights when the sound is muted (page 16).
15 Master volume level
Shows the overall volume level.
“---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB” indicates
the maximum level.
16 Input function indicators
Light to indicate the input function you have selected.
17 Scroll indicators
Light when there are more selectable items when making
the various settings.
18 Speaker indicators
Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B
(page 91).
19
SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 93).
20 Matrix decoding format indicators
2 2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate Pro
Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 62).
Neo:6 –
When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing
(page 62)
.
21
MSTR
Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master Audio signal.
22 Character display
Displays various system information.
23 Remote control mode indicator
Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode
setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.) (SC-27: page 96,
SC-25: page 103)

Connecting your equipment
03
20
en
Chapter 3:
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
Important
• Illustration shows the SC-27, however connections for the SC-25 are the same except where noted.
Rear panel
CAUTION
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the
top of the receiver.
1 HDMI connectors (x6)
Multiple inputs and two outputs for high-quality audio/
video connection to compatible HDMI devices.
See Connecting your TV and playback components on
page 29.
See Switching the HDMI output on page 94.
2 LAN (10/100) terminal
See Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs on
page 71.
3 XM Radio input
See Connecting an XM Radio tuner on page 37.
4 Coaxial digital audio inputs (x3 (SC-27), p20-x2 (SC-25))
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.
See also The Input Setup menu on page 48 to assign
the inputs.
5 Optical digital audio inputs (x4)/outputs (x2)
Use the OUT jack for recording to a CD or MiniDisc
recorder.
See Connecting other audio components on page 35.
Use the IN jacks for digital audio sources, including DVD
players/recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players,
etc.
See also The Input Setup menu on page 48 to assign
the inputs.
6 12 V trigger jacks
(total 50 mA max.)
(x2)
Use to switch components in your system on and off
according to the input function of the receiver.
See Switching components on and off using the 12
volt trigger on page 41.
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 - 16 Ω Ω .
ATTENTION:
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 - 16 Ω Ω .
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
ANTENNA
PRE OUT
AC IN
MULTI CH IN
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
31
ASSIGNABLE
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1IN
2
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P P YR B PR BP Y
PR BP Y
(DVR)
IN
3
(VIDEO 1)
ZONE 2 OUT MONITOR OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
PHONO
IN
CD
IN OUT IN
CD-R/TAPE TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVD
IN OUT
DVR
IN
SIGNAL
GND S-VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
FRONT CENTER
B A
RSURROUND BACK/
Class 2 Wiring
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
(Single)
RSURROUND L R FRONT CENTER
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 16
17 21
18
19
20

Connecting your equipment 03
21
en
7 SIRIUS Radio input
See Connecting a SiriusConnect™ tuner on page 37.
8 Remote inputs/output
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor
for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.
See Connecting an IR receiver on page 40.
9 Control input/output
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you
can control all your equipment from a single IR remote
sensor.
See Operating other Pioneer components with this
unit’s sensor on page 40.
10 RS-232C connector
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when
using Advanced MCACC or Full Band Phase Control.
See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on
page 41.
11 Component video inputs (x3)
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has
component video output, such as a DVD player.
See Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output
on page 30.
12
SC-27 only: ZONE 2
component video output
Use to connect monitors or TVs in a separate room.
See MULTI-ZONE setup on page 38.
13 MULTI-ZONE audio/video outputs
Use to connect a second or third amplifier and monitors
or TVs in a separate room.
See MULTI-ZONE setup on page 38.
14 Composite, S-Video and Component video monitor
outputs
Use to connect monitors and TVs.
See
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input on
page 31.
15 Stereo analog audio source inputs (x3)/output (x1)
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,
tape decks, turntables, etc.
See Connecting other audio components on page 35.
16 Audio/video source inputs (x5)/output (x1)
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks
for composite video, S-Video and stereo analog audio.
See Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other
video sources on page 33.
17 AM and FM antenna terminals
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio
broadcasts.
See Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 36.
18 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs
Use to connect separate amplifiers for front, center,
surround, surround back and subwoofer channels.
See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 36 (see
also Installing your speaker system on page 25 for
powered subwoofer connection).
19 Multichannel analog audio inputs
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with
multichannel analog outputs.
See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on
page 34.
20 Speaker terminals
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround
and surround back speakers.
See on page 24.Connecting the speakers
21 AC power inlet
Connect the supplied power cord here.
See Plugging in the receiver on page 44.

Connecting your equipment
03
22
en
Determining the speakers’ application
Surround sound with a strong sense of presence can be
enjoyed by connecting 7 speakers and 1 subwoofer. It is
also possible to achieve high sound quality using bi-amp
connections and to enjoy music in other rooms using the
MULTI-ZONE feature. High sound quality can be
achieved with a minimum of two speakers.
• Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right
channels ( and ).
• The Surr Back System setting must be made if you
use any of the connections shown below other than
[1] (see Selecting the Surr Back system on page 27).
[1] 7.1ch surround connection
(Simple connection & Best surround)
*Default setting
These connections prioritize surround sound with a
speaker layout like that in a movie theater.
• Surr Back System setting: Normal (default)
• If you have six speakers, either only connect one
surround back speaker (6.1 ch surround), or connect
for the 7.1-channel setting as shown on the diagram
below but without the center speaker.
[2] 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping connection
(High quality surround)
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high
sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.
• Surr Back System setting: Front Bi-Amp
*Bi-amp compatible speaker
[3] 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection
(Multi Zone)
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo
playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The
selection of input devices is limited.)
• Surr Back System setting: ZONE 2
[4]
5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo
playback of the same sound on the B speakers.
• Surr Back System setting: Speaker B
Other speaker connection
• Your favorite speaker connections can be selected
even if you have fewer than 5.1 speakers.
• When not connecting a subwoofer, connect speakers
with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the
front channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency
component is played from the front speakers, so the
speakers could be damaged.)
•
After connecting, be sure to conduct the Auto
MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure.
See Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 46.
LR
SW
C
L R
SL
SBL SBR
SR
Subwoofer
Center
Front
right
Front
left
Surround
left
Surround
right
Surround
back left Surround
back right
SW
C
L R
SL SR
Subwoofer
Center
Front
right*
Front
left*
Surround
left
Surround
right
SW
C
L R
SL SR
L
ZONE 2
R
Subwoofer
Center
Front
right
Front
left RightLeft
Surround
left
Surround
right
SW
C
L R
SL SR
Subwoofer
Center
Front
right
Front
left
Speaker B
Surround
left
Surround
right

Connecting your equipment 03
23
en
Placing the speakers
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your
speakers as shown below.
5.1 channel surround system:
6.1 channel surround system:
7.1 channel surround system:
THX speaker system setup
If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the THX
INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer has one)
or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.
See also THX Audio Setting on page 127 to make the
settings that will give you the best sound experience
when using the Home THX modes (page 63).
Some tips for improving sound quality
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines
should help you to get the best sound from your system.
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the
other speakers should be at about ear-level when
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very
high on a wall is not recommended.
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2
m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at equal distance from
the TV.
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a
narrower angle.
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so
that the sound of the center channel is localized at
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of
the front left and right speakers.
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
• Surround and surround back speakers should be
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft. to 3 ft.) higher than
your ears and tilted slight downward. Make sure the
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the
speakers should be more directly behind the listener
than for home theater playback.
• If the surround speakers cannot be set directly to the
side of the listening position with a 7.1-channel
system, the surround effect can be enhanced by
turning off the Up Mix function (see Setting the Up
Mix function on page 67).
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away
from the listening position than the front and center
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound
effect.
Center
Front left Front right
Surround
left
Surround
right
Subwoofer
120° 120°
Center
Front left Front right
Surround
left
Surround
right
Subwoofer
120° 120°
Surround Back
Center
Front left Front right
Surround
left Surround
right
Subwoofer
90° 90°
Surround back
left
Surround back
right
60°

Connecting your equipment
03
24
en
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to
match these up with the terminals on the speakers
themselves.
CAUTION
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
Bare wire connections
1 Twist exposed wire strands together.
(fig. A)
2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.
(fig. B)
3 Tighten terminal.
(fig. C)
Banana plug connections
If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana
plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut, then plug
the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.
Important
• Please refer to the manual that came with your
speakers for details on how to connect the other end
of the speaker cables to your speakers.
• Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. It is not
possible to connect using speaker cables.
CAUTION
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.
This not only improves sound quality, but also
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of
external shocks such as earthquakes.
fig. A fig. B fig. C
10 mm ( 3/8 in.)

Connecting your equipment 03
25
en
Installing your speaker system
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always
be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the
left surround back terminal).
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
ATTENTION:
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
ANTENNA
PRE OUT
AC IN
MULTI CH IN
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
31
ASSIGNABLE
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1IN
2
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
(DVR)
IN
3
(VIDEO 1)
ZONE 2 OUT MONITOR OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
PHONO
IN
CD
IN OUT IN
CD-R/TAPE TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVD
IN OUT
DVR
IN
SIGNAL
GND S-VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
FRONT CENTER
B A
R SURROUND BACK/
Class 2 Wiring
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
(Single)
R SURROUND L R FRONT CENTERL
L
R
L
R
L
R
FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
B A
R SURROUND BACK/ L
(Single)
R SURROUND L R FRONT CENTERL
SPEAKERS
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
Front left
Subwoofer Center
Surround right
Surround back rightSurround back left
Front right
Surround left
The surround back terminals can also be
used for the Speaker B and ZONE 2.
7.1 ch surround setting
No connect
Surround back
Speaker B setting
Speaker B - Left Speaker B - Right
ZONE 2 setting
ZONE 2 - Left ZONE 2 - Right
6.1 ch surround setting

Connecting your equipment
03
26
en
Bi-amping your speakers
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different
amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
CAUTION
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals
have two metal plates that connect the High to the
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for
more information.
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing
so may damage your speakers.
Bi-wiring your speakers
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-
amping.
• With these connections, the Surr Back System
setting makes no difference.
• To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to
the speaker terminal on the receiver.
Using a banana plug for the second connection is
recommended.
CAUTION
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same
terminal in this way.
• When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for bi-
amping shown at the left.
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
ATTENTION:
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
ANTENNA
PRE OUT
AC IN
MULTI CH IN
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
31
ASSIGNABLE
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1IN
2
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P P YR B PR BP Y
PR BP Y
(DVR)
IN
3
(VIDEO 1)
ZONE 2 OUT MONITOR OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
PHONO
IN
CD
IN OUT IN
CD-R/TAPE TV/SAT
IN VIDEO1
IN VIDEO2
IN
DVD
IN OUT DVR IN
SIGNAL
GND S-VIDEO
VIDEO
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
FRONT CENTER
B A
RSURROUND BACK/
Class 2 Wiring
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
L
(Single)
RSURROUND L R FRONT CENTER
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
B A
RSURROUND BACK/ L
(Single)
RSURROUND L R FRONT CENTER
L
SPEAKERS
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
High
Low
High
Low
Front left
Subwoofer
Center
Surround right
Front right
Surround left
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
Bi-amp compatible
speaker

Connecting your equipment 03
27
en
Selecting the Surr Back system
The surround back terminals can be used for bi-amping,
Speaker B and ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the
surround back speakers. Make this setting according to
the application.
ZONE 2 setup
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo
playback on another component in ZONE 2.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back
speaker terminals.
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections
on page 25.
2 Select ‘
ZONE 2
’ from the
Surr Back System
menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 124 to do this.
Speaker B setup
You can listen to stereo playback in another room.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back
speaker terminals.
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections
on page 25.
2 Select ‘
Speaker B
’ from the
Surr Back System
menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 124 to do this.
Bi-Amping setup
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high
sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.
1 Connect Bi-amp compatible speakers to the front
and surround back speaker terminals.
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 26.
2 Select ‘
Front Bi-Amp
’ from the
Surr Back System
menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 124 to do this.
About the
audio connection
There are several types of audio input and output
terminals on this receiver. The receiver selects the first
available signal in the following order when you choose
AUTO as the input signal:
• With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals can be
transferred in high quality over a single cable.
CAUTION
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter
protecting the optical socket.
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.
Types of cables and
terminals
Transferable audio
signals
Sound signal priority
HDMI HD audio
Digital (Coaxial) Conventional digital audio
Digital (Optical)
RCA (Analog)
(White/Red)
Conventional analog audio

Connecting your equipment
03
28
en
About the video converter
The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the MONITOR OUT jacks. The only
exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s
HDMI video outputs when connecting this video source. 1
If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 48), the
converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-Video, then composite (in that order).
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the
Video options on page 90) OFF.
Note
1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that
some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion
(in Setting the Video options on page 90) OFF.
• The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p and
1080i. 1080p signal cannot be converted.
• Only signals with an input reso r the composite and S-Vilution of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input fo deo MONITOR
OUT.
HDMI IN
VIDEO IN VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN S-VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
HDMI OUT
Y
P
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
STANDBY/ON
INPUT
SELECTOR
PHASE
CONTROL ADVANCED
MCACC PQLS HDMI
MASTER
VOLUME
High picture quality
Terminal for
connection with
source device
Terminal for
connection with TV
monitor
Video signals can be output
This receiver
Source device TV monitor
Types of cables
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of certain
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned
by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Connecting your equipment 03
29
en
Connecting your TV and playback components
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.), you can connect it to this
receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.
If the TV and playback components support the Pioneer KURO LINK feature, the convenient KURO LINK functions can
be used (see KURO LINK on page 84).
• When connecting a Blu-ray disc player, connect the
player to the receiver’s BD IN terminal.
• When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible
monitor or a flat panel TV using the HDMI OUT 2
terminal, switch the HDMI output setting to HDMI
OUT 2 or HDMI OUT ALL. See Switching the HDMI
output on page 94.
• The HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an
HDMI-equipped component is connected.
• For input components, connections other than HDMI
connections are also possible (see Connecting your
DVD player with no HDMI output on page 30).
• If your Blu-ray disc player offers multi-channel analog
audio outputs, see Connecting the multichannel
analog inputs on page 34.
• The sound of the TV cannot be heard over the receiver
if the TV is connected using an HDMI cable.
If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the
receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
cables.
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
ATTENTION:
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
ANTE
N
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
31
ASSIGNABLE
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1IN
2
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P P YR B PR BP Y
PR BP Y
(DVR)
IN
3
(VIDEO 1)
ZONE 2 OUT MONITOR OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
PHONO
IN
CD
IN OUT IN
CD-R/TAPE TV/SAT
IN
V
DVD
IN
SIGNAL
GND S-VIDEO
VIDEO
B
RSURROUND BACK/
Class 2 Wiring
L
(Single)
R
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
BD
IN
IN
1
OUT
1
(KURO
LINK )
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
(DVD)
OPTICAL
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
TV/SAT
IN
DIGITAL OUT
OPTICAL ANALOG
R L
AUDIO OUT
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
HDMI/DVI-compatible
Blu-ray disc player
Other HDMI/DVI-
equipped component
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
or flat panel TV
Select one
This connection is
required in order to
listen to the sound of
the TV over the receiver.

Connecting your equipment
03
30
en
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no
HDMI output) to the receiver.
• If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the
receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
cables.
• Component video should give superior picture quality
when compared to composite or S-Video. You can
also take advantage of progressive scan video (if your
source and TV are both compatible), which delivers a
very stable, flicker-free picture. See the manuals that
came with your TV and source component to check
whether they are compatible with progressive-scan
video.
• If your DVD player offers multi-channel analog audio
outputs, see Connecting the multichannel analog
inputs on page 34.
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
ATTENTION:
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
31
ASSIGNABLE
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1IN
2
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P P YR B PR BP Y
PR BP Y
(DVR)
IN
3
(VIDEO 1)
ZONE 2 OUT MONITOR OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
PHONO
IN
CD
IN OUT IN
CD-R/TAPE
T
DVD
IN
SIGNAL
GND S-VIDEO
VIDEO
B
RSURROUND BACK/
Class 2 Wiring
L
(Single)
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
HDMI
OUT
1
(KURO
LINK )
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
(DVD)
OPTICAL
(DVR)
IN
2
DVD
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
31
ASSIGNABLE
-
IN
1
(DVD)
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO VIDEO
ANALOG
R
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL L
HDMI IN
YP
B
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DVD player, etc.
HDMI/DVI-compatible
monitor or flat panel TV
Select one Select one

Connecting your equipment 03
31
en
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to the
receiver.
• With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI cable.
Connect the DVD player’s video signals using a composite, S-VIDEO or component cord.
• Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio
on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to input
video signals.
Depending on the video component, it may not be
possible to output signals connected by HDMI and
other methods simultaneously, and it may be
necessary to make output settings. Please refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your component
for more information.
• Component video should give superior picture quality
when compared to composite or S-Video. You can
also take advantage of progressive scan video (if your
source and TV are both compatible), which delivers a
very stable, flicker-free picture. See the manuals that
came with your TV and source component to check
whether they are compatible with progressive-scan
video.
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,
you can connect these instead. See also see
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on
page 34.
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
ATTENTION:
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
31
ASSIGNABLE
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1IN
2
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P P YR B PR BP Y
PR BP Y
(DVR)
IN
3
(VIDEO 1)
ZONE 2 OUT MONITOR OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
PHONO
IN
CD
IN OUT IN
CD-R/TAPE
T
DVD
IN
SIGNAL
GND S-VIDEO
VIDEO
B
RSURROUND BACK/
Class 2 Wiring
L
(Single)
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
HDMI
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
(DVD)
OPTICAL
(DVR)
IN
2
DVD
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
31
ASSIGNABLE
-
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
2
MONITOR OUT
PR BP Y
VIDEO IN
VIDEOS-VIDEO Y
P
B
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO VIDEO
ANALOG
R
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
HDMI OUT
LY
P
B
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DVD player, etc.
TV
Select one
Select one Select one

Connecting your equipment
03
32
en
• The input functions below are assigned by default to
the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to The
Input Setup menu on page 48 to change the
assignments if other connections are used.
For example, the BD terminal is fixed to BD input; no
other audio and video signals can be input to this
terminal.
About HDMI
1
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for
limitations), Video CD/Super VCD and CD. See About the
video converter on page 28 for more on HDMI
compatibility.
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia
Interface (HDMI™) technology.
This receiver supports the functions described below
through HDMI connections.
• Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents
protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))
• Deep Color signal transfer 2
• x.v.Color signal transfer 2
• Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio
signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels
• Input of the following digital audio formats:
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate
audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio), DVD-
Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD
• Synchronized operation with components using the
KURO LINK function (see KURO LINK on page 84)
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing, LLC.
“x.v.Color” and x.v.Color logo are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
Input function Input Terminals
Digital HDMI
Component
DVD COAX-1 IN 1
BD BD( )
TV/SAT OPT-1
DVR OPT-2 IN 2
VIDEO 1 OPT-3 IN 3
VIDEO 2 COAX-3a
a.SC-27 only
HDMI 1 (HDMI-1)
HDMI 2 ( )HDMI-2
HDMI 3 (HDMI-3)
HDMI 4
(front panel)
(HDMI-4)
CD COAX-2
CD-R/TAPE OPT-4
Note
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection,
however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some
components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video
this is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.
•
This receiver supports SACD,
Dolby Digital Plus
,
Dolby TrueHD
and
DTS-HD Master Audio
. To take advantage of these formats, however, make
sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.
2 Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.

Connecting your equipment 03
33
en
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other video sources
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices,
including HDD/DVD recorders and VCRs.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The
Input Setup menu on page 48).
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
ATTENTION:
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
ANTENNA
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
31
ASSIGNABLE
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1IN
2
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P P YR B PR BP Y
PR BP Y
(DVR)
IN
3
(VIDEO 1)
ZONE 2 OUT
MONITOR OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
PHONO
IN
CD
IN OUT IN
CD-R/TAPE TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
VIDEO2
IN
DVD
IN OUT
DVR
IN
SIGNAL
GND S-VIDEO
VIDEO
FRO
N
FRO
N
B A
RSURROUND BACK/
Class 2 Wiring
L
(Single)
RSURROUND L R
L
R
FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
(DVD)
OPTICAL
OUT
DVR
IN
OUT 1
(DVR)
IN
2
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIALANALOG
R L
ANALOG
R L
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL
AUDIO IN
OPTICAL
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO VIDEO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEOVIDEO
HDD/DVD recorder, VCR, etc.
Select oneSelect one Select one
Select one

Connecting your equipment
03
34
en
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
other set-top box
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the
receiver which input you connected the set-top box to
(see The Input Setup menu on page 48).
Connecting the multichannel analog
inputs
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may
have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending
on whether your player supports surround back
channels). Make sure that the player is set to output
multichannel analog audio.
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK L jack on this receiver.
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround
speakers for the surround channel, not the surround
back channel.
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
ATTENTION:
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
OPTICAL
RS-232C
COAXIAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
ANTENN
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
OUT 1
OUT 2
31
ASSIGNABLE
-
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1IN
2
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P P YR B PR BP Y
PR BP Y
(DVR)
IN
3
(VIDEO 1)
ZONE 2 OUT MONITOR OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
PHONO
IN
CD
IN OUT IN
CD-R/TAPE TV/SAT
IN
VID
I
N
DVD
IN
SIGNAL
GND S-VIDEO
VIDEO
B
RSURROUND BACK/
Class 2 Wiring
L
(Single)
R
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
(DVD)
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEOVIDEO
ANALOG
R
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL L
STB
Select one
Select one
V
IDEO
ANTENNA
PRE OUT
MULTI CH IN
31
LE
-
Y
TV/SAT
IN VIDEO1
IN VIDEO2
IN
DVD
IN OUT DVR IN
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
FRONT CENTER
A
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
g
le)
R SURROUND L R FRONT CENTERL
L
R
L
R
FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP
MULTI CH IN
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
R
R L
FRONT
OUTPUT
R L
SURROUND
OUTPUT
CENTER
OUTPUT
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT
R L
SURROUND BACK
OUTPUT
DVD player, etc.

Connecting your equipment 03
35
en
Connecting other audio components
This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback.
This receiver features five stereo audio-only inputs. One of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with audio
recorders.
One of the audio inputs (PHONO) is a dedicated turntable input which should not be used for any other type of
component. This input also has a grounding terminal that most turntables require.
Most digital components also have analog connections.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The
Input Setup menu on page 48).
• If you’re connecting a recorder, connect the analog
audio outputs to the analog audio inputs on the
recorder.
Turntables only:
• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the
ground terminal on this receiver.
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a
built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs
instead.
About the WMA9 Pro decoder
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9
Professional 1 (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using HDMI, coaxial
or optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9
Pro-compatible player. However, the connected DVD
player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro
format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital
output.
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
ATTENTION:
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
ANTENNA
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
31
ASSIGNABLE
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1IN
2
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P P YR B PR BP Y
PR BP Y
(DVR)
IN
3
(VIDEO 1)
ZONE 2 OUT MONITOR OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
PHONO
IN
CD
IN OUT IN
CD-R/TAPE TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO1
IN
DVD
IN
SIGNAL
GND S-VIDEO
VIDEO
B
RSURROUND BACK/
Class 2 Wiring
L
(Single)
RSU
R
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
OUT IN
CD-R/TAPE
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN
2(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
OPTICAL
OUT 1
(CD-R)
IN
4
PHONO
IN
SIGNAL
GND
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIALOPTICAL
ANALOG
R L
AUDIO OUT
ANALOG
R L
AUDIO IN
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.
Select oneSelect one
Note
1 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be
downsampled to 48 kHz.

Connecting your equipment
03
36
en
Connecting additional amplifiers
This receiver has more than enough power for any home
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power
your speakers.
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))
terminal only.
• The sound from the surround back terminals will
depend on how you have configured the Surround
back speaker setting on page 124.
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.
If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker
setting (see Speaker Setting on page 124) to LARGE.
Connecting AM/FM antennas
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna
as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality,
connect external antennas (see Connecting external
antennas below).
1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna
wires.
2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into
each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM
antenna wires.
3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction
indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the
stand (fig. b).
• If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other
surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before
clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the
reception is clear.
4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a
direction giving the best reception.
5 Connect the FM wire antenna in the same way as
the AM loop antenna.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
PRE OUT
MULTI CH IN
OUT
DVR
IN
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
FRONT CENTER
A
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
(Single)
RFRONT CENTER
L
L
R
L
R
AM LOOP
FRONT CENTER
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
L
R
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(Single)
R
L
ANALOG
INPUT
R
L
ANALOG
INPUT
R
L
ANALOG
INPUT
ANALOG
INPUT
ANALOG
INPUT
Powered
subwoofer
Front channel
amplifier
Center channel
amplifier (mono)
Surround channel
amplifier
Surround back
channel amplifier
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP
3
12
4
5
fig. bfig. a fig. c

Connecting your equipment 03
37
en
Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception connect an external FM
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω.
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to
20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP
terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop
antenna.
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally
outdoors.
Connecting an XM Radio tuner
After purchasing an XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock
(both sold separately), you will also need to activate the
XM Radio service to begin receiving broadcasts.
• For instructions on playing the XM Radio, see
Listening to XM Radio on page 57.
Connecting a SiriusConnect™ tuner
To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts, you will
need to activate your SiriusConnect™ tuner.
You will also need to connect the antenna and AC
adapter to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.
• For instructions on playing the SIRIUS Radio, see
Listening to SIRIUS Radio on page 59.
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP
75 Ω coaxial cable
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP
Outdoor
antenna
5 m to 6 m
(16 ft. to 20 ft.)
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTIO
SPEAKER I
AT T EN
ENCEINTE
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P
R
P
B
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE M
D'EMPLO
SELECTA
XM
IN
SATELLiTE RADiO
SATELLiTE
RADiO
XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock
with antenna
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTIO
SPEAKER I
AT T EN
ENCEINTE
OPTICAL
RS-232C
COAXIAL
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P
R
P
B
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE M
D'EMPLO
SELECTA
SIRIUS
IN
SIRIUS
H
SIRIUS
H
Antenna
SiriusConnect™
HOME tuner AC adapter

Connecting your equipment
03
38
en
MULTI-ZONE setup
This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-
ZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is shown below, but the number of MULTI-ZONE connections (and
the way you choose to connect them) depends on how you want to set up your system.
Different sources can be playing in three zones at the
same time or, depending on your needs, the same source
can also be used. The main and sub zones have
independent power (the main zone power can be off
while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub
zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel
controls. However, you may need to specify the volume
settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 129.
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you have a
separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub
zone, and a separate TV and a separate amplifier 1 (and
speakers) for your secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will
also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on
page 39 for your primary sub zone. There are two primary
sub zone setups possible with this system. Choose
whichever works best for you.
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows the signals that can be output
to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3:
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPED
A
ATTENTIO
ENCEINTE D'IMP
E
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P P YR B PR
(DV
R
ZONE 2 OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
P
H
SI
G
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
L
R
R L
AUDIO IN
VIDEO INVIDEO IN
R L
AUDIO IN
Main zone
Sub zone (ZONE 2)
Sub zone (ZONE 3)
Note
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub
zone. You can, however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.
Sub Zone Input functions available
ZONE 2 Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT). a
With video signals, b the composite video
(VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT) and component video
(COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT)
c signals
can be output d but the S-Video signal cannot
be output.
a.Any analog signal. (This does not apply for the MULTI CH IN and
PHONO inputs.)
b.JPEG files cannot be played with the input set to USB input.
c.The COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is only provided on the
SC-27. The OSD is not displayed if only the COMPONENT VIDEO
ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected.
d.SC-27 only: The video convert function does not work for ZONE 2.
Connect the composite video and component video to the same
types of jacks for the inputs and outputs.
ZONE 3 Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT). a
With video signals, b the composite video
(VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT) signals can be output.

Connecting your equipment 03
39
en
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)
• Connect a separate amplifier to the
AUDIO ZONE 2
OUT
jacks and a TV monitor to the
VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT
jack, both on this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub
zone amplifier as shown below.
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting
on page 124 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the
sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling
the main zone (for example, changing the input function
or starting playback).
• Connect a TV monitor to the
VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT
1
jacks on this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.
Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 3)
• Connect a separate amplifier to the
AUDIO ZONE 3
OUT
jacks and a TV monitor to the
VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT
jack, both on this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub
zone amplifier as shown below.
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
C
S
P
A
E
N
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P
R
P
B
Y
ZONE 2 OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
Z
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
V
O
D
'
S
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
R L
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
Main zone
Sub zone (ZONE 2)
Note
1SC-27 only: COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to output clear images.
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
ATTENTION:
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .
COMPONENT VID
E
1
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1IN
2
(DVD)
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
(DVR)
IN
3
(VIDEO 1)
ZONE 2 OUT
MONITOR OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
PHONO
IN
CD
IN OUT IN
CD-R/TAPE DV
D
IN
SIGNAL
GND S-VIDEO
VIDEO
B
RSURROUND BACK/
Class 2 Wiring
L
(Single)
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
B
RSURROUND BACK/ L
(Single)
RL
VIDEO IN
Main zoneSub zone (ZONE 2)
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTIO
N
SPEAKER IMP
E
ATTENTI
ENCEINTE D'I
M
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P
R
P
B
Y
P
(
D
ZONE 2 OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MO
D
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABL
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
L
R
VIDEO IN
R L
AUDIO IN
Main zone
Sub zone (ZONE 3)

Connecting your equipment
03
40
en
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of
this receiver.1
1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the
IR IN
jack on
the rear of this receiver.
2 Connect the
IR IN
jack of another component to the
IR OUT
jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the
IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for
the type of cable necessary for the connection.
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor below to connect to the
CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.
Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks
which can be used to link components together so that
you can use just the remote sensor of one component.
When you use a remote control, the control signal is
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.
2
Important
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or
HDMI jacks connected to another component for
grounding purposes.
1 Decide which component you want to use the
remote sensor of.
When you want to control any component in the chain,
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the
corresponding remote control.
2 Connect the
CONTROL OUT
jack of that component
to the
CONTROL IN
jack of another Pioneer component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
Continue the chain in the same way for as many
components as you have.
Note
1 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR
compatibility.
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.
LAN
(10/100)
S
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(D
P
R
IR
CONTROL
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
INOUT
CONTROL
IN
IR
IR receiver
Closet or shelving unit
Non-Pioneer
component
Pioneer
component
2 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, see Setting the remote to control other components on
page 103.
• If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the
remote sensor.
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTION:
SPEAKER IMPEDAN
C
ATTENTION
ENCEINTE D'IMPED
A
OPTICAL
RS-232C
IR
CONTROL
BD
IN
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
PH
O
I
N
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MODE
D'EMPLOI
SELECTABLE
CONTROL
IN
OUT
CONTROL
IN OUT
IN OUT
CONTROL

Connecting your equipment 03
41
en
Switching components on and off using
the 12 volt trigger
You can connect components in your system (such as a
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input
function. However, you must specify which input
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup
menu on page 48. Note that this will only work with
components that have a standby mode.1
• Connect the
12 V TRIGGER
jack of this receiver to
the 12 V trigger of another component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA.
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on
page 48.
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC
output
When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
(see page 115) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of
your listening room, the 3D graphs of the reverb
characteristics and group delay characteristics in your
listening room (before and after calibration) can be
checked on a computer screen by connecting the
receiver to the computer and using a special application
to transfer the data. The various MCACC parameters can
also be checked on the computer.
Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect
the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C
jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be
cross type, female–female).
The software to output the results is available from the
support area of the Pioneer website (http://
www.pioneerelectronics.com/PUSA/
Home+Entertainment+Custom+Install). Instructions
for using the software are also available here. If you have
any questions regarding, please contact the Customer
Support Division of Pioneer.
Please make sure your system meets the following
requirements:
• The computer must be a PC functioning with one of
the following operating systems: Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/
Ultimate SP1, Windows
®
XP Professional/Home
Edition SP3 or Windows
®
2000 Professional SP4.
• The monitor must have a display resolution of 800 x
600 dots (SVGA) or greater.
• The computer must be equipped with at least one RS-
232C port.
2
• System must have internet access.
Microsoft®, Windows®Vista, Windows®XP and Windows®2000 are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
Note
1 Triggered connections with up to two devices compatible with 12 volt triggers can be made with this receiver.
LAN
(10/100)
S
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(D
P
R
12 V
TRIGGER
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
12 V
TRIGGER
2 Laptops and other computers not equipped with an RS-232C port can be connected via USB port using a commercially available USB to
RS-232C converter cable (USB to serial converter cable). For instructions on COM port connections and settings, contact the manufacturer
of your computer.

Connecting your equipment
03
42
en
• Connect your computer to the
RS-232C
jack on the
rear panel of the receiver.
Make sure that the receiver and all connected
components are switched off and disconnected from the
power outlet when you do this.1
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS-
232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on
this receiver. See the documentation provided with the
Advanced MCACC application for more information.
Connecting an HDMI-equipped
component to the front panel input
There is an HDMI input terminal on the front panel. High
quality pictures can be viewed via the receiver simply by
connecting an HDMI-equipped video camera with a
single HDMI cable. HDMI-equipped components other
than video cameras can also be connected to this
terminal.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel
door to access the front panel input.
• Select this input using HDMI, INPUT SELECT
(remote) or the INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to
select HDMI 4.
Note
1 The various parameters, the reverb characteristics data and group delay characteristics data used for display on the computer are not cleared
when the power is turned off (see Output PC on page 120).
LAN
(10/100)
SPEAKERS
CAUTIO
N
SPEAKER IMP
E
ATTENT
I
ENCEINTE D'I
M
OPTICAL
RS-232C
HDMI
COAXIAL
XM
IR
CONTROL
SIRIUS
BD
IN
IN
IN
12 V
TRIGGER
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
IN
1
(OUTPUT
12V
TOTAL
50 mA
MAX)
1
2
IN
1
IN
IN
2
OUT
OUT
(DVD)
P
R
P
B
Y
P
(
D
ZONE 2 OUT
ZONE 2
OUT
VIDEO
ZONE 3
OUT
L
R
SEE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
SELECTABLE
VOIR LE MO
D
D'EMPLOI
SELECTAB
L
RS-232C
RS-232C
Personal computer
PHONES
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
ON/OFF
MCACC
SETUP MIC
TUNER EDIT
USBHDMI 4
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
AUT O SURR/ALC/
ST REAM D IRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREOBAND
This receiver
Video camera, etc.

Connecting your equipment 03
43
en
Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow
you to control playback of audio or video content from
your iPod using the controls of this receiver.
• Switch the receiver into standby then use the
supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to the
iPod/
iPhone/USB
terminal on the front panel of this
receiver.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel
door to access the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal.
• It is also possible to connect using the cable included
with the iPod, but in this case it is not possible to view
pictures via the receiver.
• For the cable connection, refer to also the operating
instructions for iPod.
• For instructions on playing the iPod, see Playing an
iPod on page 51.
Connecting a USB device
It is possible to playback files using the USB interface on
the front of this receiver.
• Switch the receiver into standby then connect your
USB device to the
USB
terminal on the front panel of
this receiver.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel
door to access the USB terminal.
• For instructions on playing the USB device, see
Playing a USB device on page 53.
PHONES
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
ON/OFF
MCACC
SETUP MIC
TUNER EDIT
USB
HDMI 4
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
AUT O SURR/ALC/
ST REAM D IRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREOBAND
ME NU
iPod
iPod cable
(supplied)
This receiver
PHONES
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
ON/OFF
MCACC
SETUP MIC
TUNER EDIT
USBHDMI 4
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
AUTO SURR/ALC/
ST REAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREOBAND
USB mass
storage device
This receiver

Connecting your equipment
03
44
en
Plugging in the receiver
Only plug in after you have connected all your
components to this receiver, including the speakers.
1 Plug the supplied power cord into the
AC IN
socket
on the back of the receiver.
2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.
1
CAUTION
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The
power cords should be routed so that they are not
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent
service company for a replacement.
• Do not use any power cord other than the one
supplied with this unit.
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose
other than that described below.
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular
use, e.g., when on vacation.
• Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone
out before unplugging.
Note
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any
operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver
once it has stopped blinking. When you set the KURO LINK mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the KURO LINK feature,
see KURO LINK on page 84.

Basic Setup 04
45
en
Chapter 4:
Basic Setup
Important
• The procedure for setting the receiver operation
mode differs for the remote controls included with
the SC-27 and SC-25. For the SC-27’s remote control,
set the remote control operation selector switch to
RECEIVER. For the SC-25’s remote control, press the
button. When “set the remote control to
the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these
instructions, use the respective procedure described
above.
Changing the OSD display language
(OSD Language)
The language used on the Graphical User Interface
screen can be changed.
• The explanations in these operating instructions are
for when English is selected for the GUI screen.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use RECEIVER to switch on.
2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
HOME MENU
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit
the current menu.
3 Select ‘
System Setup
’ from the
HOME MENU
.
4 Select ‘
OSD Language
’ from the
System Setup
menu.
5 Select the desired language.
•English
•French
•German
•Italian
•Spanish
•Dutch
•Russian
6 Select ‘
OK
’ to change the language.
The setting is completed and the System Setup menu
reappears automatically.
RECEIVER
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
ZONE2 3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
RECEIVER
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
MUTE
ENTER
RETURN
HOME
MENU
ENTER
RETURN
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
INPUT
RECEIVER
SOURCE
RECEIVER
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
RETURN
iPod CT RL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
ENTER
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULT I OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
a.Man ual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Lang uage
d. Other Setup
4.SystemSetup 4c.OSD Language
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
La nguage
: English
OK
4c.OSD Language
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
La nguage
: English
OK

Basic Setup
04
46
en
Automatically setting up for surround
sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase
Control)
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account
ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and
tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you
have set up the microphone provided with your system,
the receiver uses the information from a series of test
tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization
for your particular room, and also to calibrate the
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers
connected.
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a
source on page 50.
Important
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the
headphones should be disconnected and the iPod/
USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM or SIRIUS Radio
function should not be selected as an input function.
CAUTION
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use RECEIVER to switch on.
2 Connect the microphone to the
MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel
door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you
do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the
microphone.1
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the
microphone is connected.2
3 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
ZONE2 3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
RECEIVER
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
MUTE
ENTER
RETURN
HOME
MENU
ENTER
RETURN
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
INPUT
RECEIVER
SOURCE
RECEIVER
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
RETURN
iPod CTRL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
ENTER
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CTRL RECEIVER
Note
1 It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.
2 • You can’t use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM or SIRIUS Radio input function is selected (in either the
main or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 91), you can’t use the HOME MENU.
• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.
PHO NE S
SPE AKER S
CO NT RO L
MULT I-Z ONE
ON/ OF F
MCACC
SET UP MIC
PARAMETER
ENTER
(T UNE )
(T UNE )
(PRES ET )(PRES ET )
AUDIO VIDEO
TU NER EDIT
USBHDMI 4
VIDEO CAMERA
iPo d
iPho ne
AUT O S URR /ALC /
ST REAM DIRE CT
HOME
TH X
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREOBAND
HOME MENU RET URN
Surr Back System : Normal
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
START
Save SYMMETRY to : M1.MEMORY 1

Basic Setup 04
47
en
4 Select
Surr Back System
setting,
1
select an MCACC
preset
2
, then select
START
.
3
Select Normal (Surround back), Speaker B, Front Bi-
Amp or ZONE 2 for the Surr Back System setting
according to connections to the surround back speaker
terminals.
5 Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to
a comfortable volume level.
6 Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the
speaker configuration in the GUI screen.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.4
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 7.
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check microphone.) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a
problem with the speaker connection.
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power
and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t
seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to
select the speaker and / to change the setting
and continue.
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring
(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker
connections.5
– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power,
disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure
again.
– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and
continue.
7 Make sure ‘
OK
’ is selected, then press
ENTER
.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker
Distance, Standing Wave, Acoustic Cal EQ and Full Band
Phase Control.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.
8 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and
the
Home Menu
menu reappears automatically.
6
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using The
Advanced MCACC menu on page 109 or The system and
the other setup on page 123.7
Note
1 • For details on the speaker layout and the Surr Back System setting, see Determining the speakers’ application on page 22.
• If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back
speaker setting on page 124 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 5.
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select Return, then select Auto MCACC for the THX Speaker setting. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 110 for more on this.
2 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now
(you can rename it later in Data Management on page 121).
3 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select Return, then select Auto MCACC to save other correction curves
(such as ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 110 for more on this.
4 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
Now Analyzing... 2/10
Environment Check
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel
Ambient Noise : OK
Microphone :
Speaker YES/NO :
L : YES
R : YES
C : YES
1a.Full Auto MCACC
SR : YES
SBR : YES
SBL : YES
SL : YES
SW : YES
10
OK RETRY
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel
5 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective
speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.
6 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Checking MCACC Data on page 118 for more on this.
7 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with
different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 124.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend
adjusting the settings manually.

Basic Setup
04
48
en
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to
the default settings (see Input function default and
possible settings on page 49). In this case, you need to
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which
terminal so the buttons on the remote control
correspond to the components you’ve connected.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use RECEIVER to switch on.
2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
HOME MENU
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your
TV.
Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
3 Select ‘
System Setup
’ from the
HOME MENU
.
4 Select ‘
Input Setup
’ from the
System Setup
menu.
5 Select the input function that you want to set up.
The default names correspond with the names next to the
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or VIDEO1)
which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote
control.
6 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your
component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical
output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s
Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical
input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to 4)
corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the
back of the receiver.
• If your component is connected via a component
video cable to an input terminal other than the
default, you must tell the receiver which input
terminal your component is connected to, or else you
may see the S-Video or composite video signals
instead of the component video signals.
1
7 When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for
other inputs.
There are three optional settings in addition to the
assignment of the input jacks:
•Input Name – You can choose to rename the input
function for easier identification. Select Rename to
do so, or Default to return to the system default.
•Input Skip – When set to ON, that input is skipped
when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT or the
front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial. (DVD and other
inputs can be still be selected directly with the input
function buttons.)
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
ZONE2 3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
RECEIVER
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
MUTE
ENTER
RETURN
HOME
MENU
ENTER
RETURN
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
INPUT
RECEIVER
SOURCE
RECEIVER
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
RETURN
iPod CT RL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
ENTER
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULT I OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CTRL RECEIVER
Note
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options
on page 90), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
a.Man ual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Lang uage
d. Other Setup
4.SystemSetup 4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Finish
Input : DVD
Input Name : Rename
Digital In : COAX-1
HDMI Input :
---
Input Skip : OFF
Component In : Comp-1
12V Trigger1 : OFF
12V Trigger2 : OFF

Basic Setup 04
49
en
•12V Trigger1/2 – After connecting a component to
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components
on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 41), select
MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding
trigger setting to switch it on automatically along
with the (main or sub) zone specified.
8 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Input function default and possible settings
The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the
name of one of the input functions. If you have connected
components to this receiver differently from (or in
addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu
on page 48 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up.
The dots () indicate possible assignments.
4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Finish
Input : DVD
Input Name : Rename
Digital In : COAX-1
HDMI Input :
---
Input Skip : OFF
Component In : Comp-1
12V Trigger1 : OFF
12V Trigger2 : OFF
Input
function
Input Terminals
Digital HDMI
Component
DVD COAX-1 a
a.With KURO LINK set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see
KURO LINK on page 84).
IN 1
BD BD()b
b.This assignment is fixed and cannot be changed.
TV/SAT OPT-1
a
DVR OPT-2 aIN 2
VIDEO1 OPT-3 aIN 3
VIDEO2 COAX-3c
c.SC-27 only
a
HDMI 1 (HDMI-1)
HDMI 2 ( )HDMI-2
HDMI 3 (HDMI-3)
HDMI 4 (HDMI-4)b
HOME
MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod/USB
XM
CD COAX-2
CD-R/TAPE OPT-4
TUNER
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
a
SIRIUS

Basic playback
05
50
en
Chapter 5:
Basic playback
Important
• The procedure for setting the receiver operation
mode differs for the remote controls included with
the SC-27 and SC-25. For the SC-27’s remote control,
set the remote control operation selector switch to
RECEIVER. For the SC-25’s remote control, press the
button. When “set the remote control to
the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these
instructions, use the respective procedure described
above.
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for
example a DVD player), your TV1 and subwoofer (if you
have one), then the receiver (press RECEIVER).
• Make sure the setup microphone is disconnected.
2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
3 Select the input function you want to play.
You can use the input function buttons on the remote
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT
SELECTOR dial.2
4 Press
AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
(
AUTO SURR
/
ALC
/
STREAM DIRECT
) to select ‘
AUTO SURROUND
’ and
start playback of the source.
3
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.
• See also Listening to your system on page 61 for
information on different ways of listening to sources.
It is possible to check on the front panel display whether
or not multi-channel playback is being performed
properly.
When using a surround back speaker, 2D+PLIIx
MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital 5.1
channel signals, and DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when
playing DTS 5.1-channel signals.
When not using a surround back speaker, DOLBY
DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital 5.1
channel signals.
If the display does not correspond to the input signal and
listening mode, check the connections and settings.
5 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
Playing a source with HDMI connection
• Use
INPUT SELECT
to select the HDMI input you’ve
connected to (for example,
HDMI 1
).
You can also perform the same operation by using the
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing
HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.
Note
1 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO1 jacks on your TV, make
sure that the VIDEO1 input is now selected).
RECEIVER
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
ZONE2 3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
RECEIVER
DVD
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
AUDIO
PARAMETER
LIST
TOOLS
VIDEO
PARAMETER
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
MUTE
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
DISP
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
RETURN
PGM
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
RECEIVER
SOURCE
RECEIVER
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
1 2
INPUT
SELECT
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO
MENU
ADV SURR
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
HDD
RECEIVER
2 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 68).
3 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby
Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be
set to a multichannel listening mode (see
Listening in surround sound on page 62
if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround
sound.

Basic playback 05
51
en
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options
on page 88 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI
audio output from your TV or flat panel TV (no sound
will be heard from this receiver).
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat
panel TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your
component or display. Note that some components
(such as video game units) have resolutions that may
not be converted. In this case, use an analog video
connection.
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s
digital out jack.
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs
for surround sound playback.1
1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the
proper output setting.
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to
output multichannel analog audio.
2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then use
INPUT SELECT
to select
MULTI CH IN
.
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front
panel.
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be
too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer
can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup
in Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input
Setup on page 128.
Playing an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.2
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
See Connecting an iPod on page 43.
• It is also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod
itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see
Switching the iPod controls on page 52.
2
SC-27 only:
Set the remote control operation
selector switch to
SOURCE
.
3 Press
iPod USB
on the remote control to switch the
receiver to the
iPod/USB
.
Loading appears in the GUI screen while the receiver
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.
When the display shows iPod top menu you’re ready to
play music from the iPod.3
Main Zone:
Sub Zone:
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage
of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver.4
You can also control all operations for music in the front
panel display of this receiver.
Note
1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.
• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.
• With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 128.
2 • This system is compatible with the audio and video of the iPod nano, iPod fifth generation (audio only), iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone.
However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The system is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.
•
Compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod and iPhone. Please be sure to use the latest available software
version.
• iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.
• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.
• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of
recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.
• When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to a different track in the sub
zone from the one playing in the main zone.
3 The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.
4 • Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.
• This feature is not available for photos od (see or video clips on your iPod. To display video clips, switch iPod operation to the iP Switching
the iPod controls on page 52).
• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.
iPod
iPod CTRL
Pl ayl ists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Po dcasts
Gen res
Compo sers
Aud iobooks
1 / 9
A/V RECEIVER
iPod
[ Playlis ts ]
[ Artis ts ]
[ Albums ]
[ Songs ]
[ Podc as ts ]
[ Ge nre s ]
[ Composers ]
[ Audiobook s ]
1/9

Basic playback
05
52
en
Finding what you want to play
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can
browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name,
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to
using your iPod directly.
1 Use
/
to select a category, then press
ENTER
to
browse that category.
• To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
2 Use
/
to browse the selected category (e.g.,
albums).
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
want to play, then press
to start playback.
1
Main Zone:
Sub Zone:
Navigation through categories on your iPod looks like this:
Playlists Songs
Artists Albums Songs
Albums Songs
Songs
Podcasts
Genres Artists Albums Songs
Composers Albums Songs
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs
Tip
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category
by selecting the All item at the top of each category
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a
particular artist.
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback controls for
your iPod. Press iPod USB to switch the remote control
to the iPod/USB operation mode.
Switching the iPod controls
2
You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod
and the receiver.
1 Press
iPod CTRL
to switch the iPod controls.
3
This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this
receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become
inactive.
2 Press
iPod CTRL
again to switch back to the receiver
controls.
Note
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.
Play mode
Track title
Album title
Artist name
Track Title
Artist Name
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Chapter Number : xxx/xxx
xxxx/xxxx
Now Playing
Album Title
iPod
iPod CTRL
Top Menu
List
Shuffle Songs
PLAY 3:02 -2:02
Playing time
File information
Track number
Track Title
Shuffle Songs
3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Album Title
Play
xxxx/xxxx
Chap
xxx/xxx
Play mode
Track title
Album title
Artist name
Playing time
File information
Track number
Button What it does
Press to start playback.
If you start playback when something other than a
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that
category will play.
Pauses/unpauses playback.
/ Press and hold during playback to start scanning.
/ Press to skip to previous/next track.
Press repeatedly to switch between
Repeat One
,
Repeat All
and
Repeat Off
.
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle
Songs, Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.
DISP Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display.
ENTER When browsing, press to move to next levels.
During playback, press to set the play and pause
modes.
RETURN When browsing, press to move to previous levels.
/When browsing, press to move to previous/next
levels.
/ During Audiobook playback, press to switch the
playback speed: Faster Normal Slower
TOP MENU Press to return to the iPod top menu screen.
2 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.
3 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver. However, when video clips recorded on the iPod are played, the
playback picture is displayed.

Basic playback 05
53
en
Playing a USB device
It is possible to playback files1 using the USB interface on
the front of this receiver.
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
See Connecting a USB device on page 43.2
2
SC-27 only:
Set the remote control operation
selector switch to
SOURCE
.
3 Press
iPod USB
on the remote control to switch the
receiver to the
iPod/USB
.
Loading appears in the GUI screen as this receiver starts
recognizing the USB device connected.3 When the
display shows USB Top menu you’re ready to playback
from the USB device.
Main Zone:
Sub Zone:
Important
If an Over Current message lights in the display, the
power requirements of the USB device are too high for
this receiver. Try following the points below:
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.
• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched
off.
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the
device) for USB power.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB
device is incompatible.
Playing back audio files stored on a USB
memory device
The maximum number of levels that you can select in
Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can display and play back
up to 30 000 folders and files within a USB memory
device.4
1 Use
/
to select ‘Music’ from the
USB Top
menu.
2 Use
/
to select a folder, then press
ENTER
to
browse that folder.
• To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
want to play, then press
to start playback.
5
Main Zone:
Note
1 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players
(MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback.
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for
any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.
2 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.
3 • When a USB memory device with a large capacity is connected, it may take some time to read all the contents.
• This receiver does not support a USB hub.
USB Top
Mu sic
Ph otos
Sl ideshow Setup
1 / 3
A/V RECEIVER
USB Top
[ Mus ic ]
[ Photos ]
[ Sli des how Setup ]
1/3
4 Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.
5 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the GUI screen instead; when neither the
album name nor the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.
• Playback stops when the last song in a USB memory device is played back to the end.
• Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
• DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.
USB Top
Mu sic
Ph otos
Sl ideshow Setup
1 / 3
A/V RECEIVER
Music
Return
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Mu sic1
Mu sic2
Mu sic3
Mu sic4
Mu sic5
1 / 9
A/V RECEIVER
Top Menu
Track Title
USB
Top Menu
Return
Random On
PLAY 3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Now Playing
Album Title
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
xxxx/xxxx
Play mode
Track title or File name
Album title
Artist name
Playing time
File information
Track number

Basic playback
05
54
en
Sub Zone:
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback controls for
your USB memory device. Press iPod USB to switch the
remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.
Playing back photo files stored on a USB
memory device
1
1 Use
/
to select ‘
Photo
s’ from the
USB Top
menu.
2 Use
/
to select a folder, then press
ENTER
to
browse that folder.
• To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
want to play, then press
to start playback.
2
The selected content is displayed in full screen and starts
a slideshow.
After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles
between play and pause (only when Theme on the
Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF)).
Basic playback controls
Slideshow Setup
Make the various settings for playing slideshows of photo
files here.
1 Use
/
to select ‘
Slideshow Setup
’ from the
USB
Top
menu.
2 Select the setting you want.
•Theme – Add various effects to the slideshow.
•Interval – Set the interval for switching the photos.
This may not be available depending on the Theme
setting.
•BGM – Play music files stored on the USB device
while displaying photos.
•Music Select – Select the folder containing the
music files to be played when BGM is set to ON.
3 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the USB Top
menu.
Button What it does
Press to start playback.
Pauses/unpauses playback.
/ Press and hold during playback to start scanning.
/ Press to skip to previous/next track.
Press repeatedly to switch between
Repeat One
,
Repeat Folder
,
Repeat All
and
Repeat Off
.
Press repeatedly to switch between Random On
and Random Off.
DISP Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display.
ENTER When browsing, press to move to next levels.
During playback, press to set the play and pause
modes.
RETURN When browsing, press to move to previous levels.
/When browsing, press to move to previous/next
levels.
TOP MENU Press to return to the USB Top menu.
Note
1 Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.
Track Title
Random On
3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Album Title
Play
xxxx/xxxx
Play mode
Track title or File name
Album title
Artist name
Playing time
Track number
USB Top
Mu sic
Ph otos
Sl ideshow Setup
2 / 3
A/V RECEIVER
2 If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for five minutes, the list screen reappears.
Button(s) What it does
ENTER, Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.
RETURN
,
Stops the Player and returns to the previous menu.
a
a.You can only use this button when Theme on the Slideshow Setup
is set to Normal (OFF).
Displays the previous photo content.
a Displays the next photo content.
a Pauses/unpauses the slideshow.
DISPa Displays the photo information.
USB Top
Mu sic
Ph otos
Sl ideshow Setup
3 / 3
A/V RECEIVER
Slideshow Setup
Return
A/V RECEIVER
Top Menu
Theme : Normal(OFF)
Interval : 5 sec
BGM : ON
Music Select : Select
Folder1

Basic playback 05
55
en
About playable file formats
The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback
although they are listed as playable file formats.
Music files
Photo files
Category Extension Stream
MP3a
a.“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
.mp3 MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio Layer-3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
WAV .wav LPCM Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit
Channel 2 ch, Monaural
WMA .wma WMA8/9b
b.Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,
Voice.
Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
Category Extension
JPEG .jpg
.jpeg
.jpe
.jif
.jfif
Format Meeting the following conditions:
• Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF format)
• Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
Resolution 30 to 8192 pixels vertical, 40 to 8192 pixels horizontal

Basic playback
05
56
en
Listening to the radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving
station presets below for more on how to do this.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1
SC-27 only:
Set the remote control operation
selector switch to
SOURCE
.
2 Press
TUNER
to select the tuner.
3 Use
BAND
to change the band (FM or AM), if
necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
4 Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Automatic tuning – To search for stations in the
currently selected band, press and hold TUNE /
for about a second. The receiver will start searching
for the next station, stopping when it has found one.
Repeat to search for other stations.
Manual tuning – To change the frequency one step
at a time, press TUNE /.
High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE / for
high speed tuning. Release the button at the
frequency you want.
Improving FM sound
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press
MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode.
This should improve the sound quality and allow you to
enjoy the broadcast.
Using the noise cut mode
The two noise cut modes can be used when receiving AM
broadcasts. Press MPX to select the noise cut mode (1 to
2).
Using Neural THX
This feature uses Neural Surround™, THX® technologies
to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.
• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT for Neural THX listening.
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 147 for more
on this.
The Neural THX mode can be selected also with
STANDARD (page 62).
Tuning directly to a station
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on
the remote control.
1
SC-27 only:
Set the remote control operation
selector switch to
SOURCE
.
2 Press
TUNER
to select the tuner.
3
Use
BAND
to change the band (FM or AM),
if
necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
4 Press
D.ACCESS
(Direct Access).
5 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of
the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1 0 6 0 0, , , , .
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This
receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven
banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each. When saving
an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see page 56) is also
stored.
1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to the radio above for more on this.
2 Press
T.EDIT
(
TUNER EDIT
).
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a blinking
memory class.
3 Press
CLASS
to select one of the seven classes, then
press
PRESET
/
to select the station preset you
want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a station
preset.
DVD
MULTI
OPERATION
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
TUNER
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
STEREO
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
ENTER
RETURN
BAND T.EDIT
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
ENTER
MPX
PGM MENU
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT
CLR
SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
ENTER
CLASS
DISP
CH
D.ACCESS
DISP
ENTER
CLASS
TUNER XM SIRIUSiPod USB
INPUT
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
TUNER
D.ACCESS
/CLR
CLASS
ENTER
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
RETURN
iPod CT RL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
T.EDIT
BAND
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
ENTER
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STAT US
REMOTE
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO ADV
SURR
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULT I OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
DISP
MPX

Basic playback 05
57
en
4 Press
ENTER
.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop
blinking and the receiver stores the station.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your station
presets.
1 Choose the station preset you want to name.
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.
2 Press
T.EDIT
(
TUNER EDIT
).
The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blinking cursor
at the first character position.
3 Input the name you want.
Choose from the following characters for a name up to
eight characters long.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
!”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]
Use / to select a character, / to set the position,
and ENTER to confirm your selection.
Tip
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3
and input eight spaces instead of a name.
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press
DISP when listening to a station to switch the display
between name and frequency.
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See
Saving station presets on page 56 if you haven’t done this
already.
1
SC-27 only:
Set the remote control operation
selector switch to
SOURCE
.
2 Press
TUNER
to select the tuner.
3 Press
CLASS
to select the class in which the station
is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.
4 Press
PRESET
/
to select the station preset you
want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote
control to recall the station preset.
Listening to Satellite Radio
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either
a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to
your satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to
residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii) and
Canada.
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free
music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country,
R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus
coverage of all the top professional and college sports
including play by play games from select leagues and
teams. Additional programming includes expert sports
talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family
programming, local traffic and weather and news from
your most trusted sources.
Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need
to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service.
Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are
provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you
choose, there are a variety of programming packages
available, including the option of adding “The Best of
SIRIUS” programming to your XM tuner or “The Best of
XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to
enjoy the most popular programming among both
services. The “Best of” packages are not available to
SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at this time.
Family friendly packages are also available to restrict
channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for
children.
To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit
xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346);
Canadian customers should visit xmradio.ca or call XM
Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers
can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit
sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
Listening to XM Radio
For details on XM Radio, see About SIRIUS and XM on
page 148.
• Press
XM
to switch to the
XM RADIO
input.
For best reception, you may need to move the XM Mini-
Tuner antenna near a window (the southernmost window
should produce the best results).
• If after pressing XM the display shows Check XM
Tuner or Check Antenna, try disconnecting the
receiver and tuner connections, and then plugging
them back in.1
Note
1 You can check the strength of reception in Using the XM Menu (page 59).

Basic playback
05
58
en
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to
select channels and navigate categories using the GUI
screen.1 The information displayed is as follows:
Main Zone:
Sub Zone:
Selecting channels and browsing by genre
From the XM Channel Guide, you can browse XM Radio
channels in the order that they appear, or you can narrow
your channel search by genre.2
1
SC-27 only:
Set the remote control operation
selector switch to
SOURCE
.
2 Press
/
to enter the XM Channel Guide, navigate
through the channels one at time with
/
, then press
ENTER
to listen to the XM radio broadcast.
• To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use /
to select a genre, then press ENTER.
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.
Tip
• You can select channels directly by pressing
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.
• You can press DISP to change XM Radio information
in the front panel display.
• The currently selected channel is automatically
chosen (without pressing ENTER) after five seconds.
Using XM HD Surround
XM HD Surround uses Neural Surround™, THX®
technologies to achieve optimal surround sound from
XM radio. XM HD Surround Sound is available on select
XM channels only.
• While listening to XM Radio, press
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
for XM HD Surround listening.
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 147 for more
on this.
XM HD Surround can be selected also with STANDARD.
Saving channel presets
This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels, stored in
seven banks, or classes (A to G) of nine channels each.3
1 Select the channel you want to memorize.
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre above.
2 Set the remote control operation selector switch to
SOURCE
(SC-27 only)
, then press
T.EDIT
.
The display shows a blinking memory class.
3 Press
CLASS
to select one of the seven classes, then
press
/
to select the channel preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.
• The default for all presets is XM1.
4 Press
ENTER
.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop
blinking and the receiver stores the XM channel.
Tip
• You can also press MEMORY during reception
display to save the information of up to five songs.
See Using the XM Menu below to recall this
information.
Note
1 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI screens. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do
everything if you prefer.
2 Select 0 (RADIO ID) from the GUI to check the Radio ID of the XM Mini-Tuner.
Life is Like a Wind
Rie fue
The Blend
Preset Number Channel Number
Category : Hits
Top Menu Pres et
Preset Class : A
Category
A 1 2 5
Signal strength
Preset class
Category
Artist name
Song name
Channel name
Channel number
Preset number
Li fe is Lik e a Win d
Rie fu e
Th e Blend A1
XM 25
Hits
A
Signal strength
Category
Artist name
Song name
Channel name
Preset class
Preset number
Channel number
The Blend
Preset Number Channel Number
Category : Hits
Top Menu Pre s et
Preset Class : A
Category
Life is Like a Wind
Rie fue
2 5A 1
Channel Guide
Ex i t
A/V RECEIVER
0 RADIO ID
1 Preview
2 Highway
4 America
5 Hank’s Pl ace
6 Fifties (50’s)
7 Sixties (60’s)
8 Seventies (70’s)
3 You can reset the channel presets and memory in Resetting the system on page 95.

Basic playback 05
59
en
Listening to channel presets
1 Set the remote control operation selector switch to
SOURCE
(SC-27 only)
, then press
CLASS
to select the
class in which the channel is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.
2 Press
/
to select the channel preset you want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote
control to recall the channel preset.
Using the XM Menu
The XM Menu provides additional XM Radio features.1
1 Set the remote control operation selector switch to
SOURCE
(SC-27 only)
, then press
TOP MENU
.
2 Use
/
to select a menu item, then press
ENTER
.
Choose from the following menu items:
•Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to
the channel guide.
•Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite
and terrestrial reception.
•Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved
song information (see Tip on page 58).
3 When you’re finished press
TOP MENU
to return to
the reception display.
Listening to SIRIUS Radio
For details on SIRIUS Radio, see About SIRIUS and XM on
page 148.
• Press
SIRIUS
to switch to the SIRIUS input.
For best reception, you may need to move the
SiriusConnect™ tuner antenna near a window (refer to
the manual for the SiriusConnect™ Home tuner for
antenna placement recommendations).2
• If after pressing SIRIUS the display shows Antenna
Error, try disconnecting the antenna and
reconnecting.3 If the display shows Check Sirius
Tuner, check the connection of the AC adapter and
this receiver to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to
select channels and navigate categories using the GUI
screen display.4 The information displayed is as follows:
Main Zone:
Sub Zone:
Note
1 You can reset the Channel Skip/Add settings in Resetting the system on page 95.
2 • In order to activate your radio subscription, you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which uniquely identifies your tuner. The SID may be found on
a sticker located on the packaging, or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label will have a printed 12-digit SID number. When you have
located the SID, write it down in the space provided near the end of this manual. Contact SIRIUS on the internet at: https://
activate.siriusradio.com
Follow the prompts to activate your subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474).
• Select 0 (SIRIUS ID) from the on-screen display to check the Radio ID of the SiriusConnect™ tuner (see Selecting channels and browsing by
genre on page 60).
3 You can check the strength of reception in Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 60.
4 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI screens. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do
everything if you prefer.
Johnny B. Goode
Chuck Berry
Fifties (50’s)
Preset Number Channel Number
Category : Decades
Composer : Chuck Berry
Top Menu Pres et
Preset Class : A
Category
A 1 1 2 3
Signal strength
Preset class
Category
Song name
Channel name
Artist name
Composer name
Channel number
Preset number
Johnny B. Goode
Chuck Berry
Fifties (50’s) A1
SR123
Decades
Chuck Berry
A
Channel name
Song name
Signal strength
Preset number
Channel number
Composer
Artist name
Preset class
Category

Basic playback
05
60
en
Selecting channels and browsing by genre
From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can browse SIRIUS
Radio channels in the order that they appear, or you can
narrow your channel search by genre.
1
SC-27 only:
Set the remote control operation
selector switch to
SOURCE
.
2 Press
/
to enter the SIRIUS Channel Guide,
navigate through the channels one at time with
/
,
then press
ENTER
to listen to the SIRIUS radio
broadcast.
• To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use /
to select a genre, then press ENTER.
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.
Tip
• You can select channels directly by pressing
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.
• You can press DISP to change SIRIUS Radio
information in the front panel display.
• The currently selected channel is automatically
chosen (without pressing ENTER) after five seconds.
Saving channel presets
This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels, stored in
seven banks, or classes (A to G) of nine channels each.
1
1 Select the channel you want to memorize.
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre on
page 60.
2 Set the remote control operation selector switch to
SOURCE (SC-27 only)
, then press
T.EDIT
.
The display shows a blinking memory class.
3 Press
CLASS
to select one of the seven classes, then
press
/
to select the channel preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.
4 Press
ENTER
.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop
blinking and the receiver stores the SIRIUS channel.
1
Tip
• You can also press MEMORY during reception
display to save the information of up to five songs.
See Using the SIRIUS Menu below to recall this
information.
Listening to channel presets
1 Set the remote control operation selector switch to
SOURCE (SC-27 only)
, then press
CLASS
to select the
class in which the channel is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.
2 Press
/
to select the channel preset you want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote
control to recall the channel preset.
Using the SIRIUS Menu
The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS Radio
features.2
1 Set the remote control operation selector switch to
SOURCE (SC-27 only)
, then press
TOP MENU
.
2 Use
/
to select a menu item, then press
ENTER
.
Choose from the following menu items:
•Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to
the channel guide.
•Parental Lock – Use / and ENTER to select
channels you would like to place under parental lock.
Channels put under parental lock are not displayed in
the Channel Guide, but may be accessed by directly
inputting their channel number and providing the
parental lock password.
•Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite
and terrestrial reception.
•Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved
song information (see Tip above).
•Password Set – Set the parental lock password.
3 When you’re finished press
TOP MENU
to return to
the reception display.
Note
1 You can reset the Channel presets and memory in Resetting the system on page 95.
Johnny B. Goode
Chuck Berry
Fifties (50’s)
Preset Number Channel Number
Category : Decades
Composer : Chuck Berry
Top Menu Preset
Category
A 1 1 2 3
Channel Guide
Ex i t
A/V RECEIVER
184 Weather
185 TWN
186 Hardcore Sports
187 InfoPlus
188 RCI Plu s
192 Rock Velours
193 energie2
198 Playboy
2 You can reset the Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the system on page 95.

Listening to your system 06
61
en
Chapter 6:
Listening to your system
Important
• The procedure for setting the receiver operation
mode differs for the remote controls included with
the SC-27 and SC-25. For the SC-27’s remote control,
set the remote control operation selector switch to
RECEIVER. For the SC-25’s remote control, press the
button. When “set the remote control to
the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these
instructions, use the respective procedure described
above.
• The listening modes and many features described in
this section may not be available depending on the
current source, settings and status of the receiver.
Auto playback
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.1
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
2 While listening to a source, press
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
(
AUTO SURR
/
ALC
/
STREAM DIRECT
)
2
for auto
playback of a source.
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see
how the source is being processed.3
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround
encoded, the proper decoding format will
automatically be selected and shows in the display.
• When listening to XM Radio, the XM HD Surround
feature is selected automatically (see Using XM HD
Surround on page 58 for more on this), and also when
listening to the FM Radio, the Neural THX feature is
selected automatically (see Using Neural THX on
page 56 for more on this).
ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver
equalizes playback sound levels.
OPTIMUM SURR – In the Optimum Surround mode, this
receiver automatically optimizes sound balance in each
scene based on actually set volume. The sound balancer
controls three major theater sound elements dialogue,
bass and surround with original algorithm.
Tip
• When an ALC is selected, the effect level can be
adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the
Audio options on page 88.
Note
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround
sound above for more on these decoding formats).
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.
RECEIVER
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO
MENU
ADV SURR
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
HDD
RECEIVER
2 • For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 65.
• The AUTO SURROUND mode cannot be selected in the following cases:
– When headphones are plugged in (except ALC).
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 88.
3 Neural THX is selected when Neural Radio is accessed with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input. However, Stereo is selected when a category
other than Neural Radio is accessed.

Listening to your system
06
62
en
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in
surround sound. However, the options available will
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source
you’re listening to.
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using
surround back channel processing on page 66.
Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround sound for
stereo and multichannel sources.1
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
2 While listening to a source, press
STANDARD
(
STANDARD SURROUND
).
2
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
With two channel sources, you can select from3:
•2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE –
Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to movie sources
•2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC –
Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to music sources
4
•2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to video games
•2 Pro Logic – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound
from the surround speakers is mono)
•Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound, especially
suited to movie sources
•Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound, especially suited
to music sources5
•Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially
suited to music sources6
•XM HD Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to music sources7
With multichannel sources, if you have connected
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you
can select (according to format):
•2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available
when you’re using two surround back speakers)
•2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
•Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure
decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital
Surround EX)
•DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS-ES encoded sources
•DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS encoded sources
Note
1 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.
2 The STANDARD listening mode cannot be selected in the following cases:
– When headphones are plugged in.
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 88.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
DISP
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURRSTANDARD
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO
MENU
ADV SURR
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
STANDARD
RECEIVER
3 If surround back channel processing (page 66) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if
the Surround back speaker setting on page 124 is set to anything but Normal), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
4 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH,
DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 88 to adjust them.
5 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio
options on page 88).
6Neural THX can be selected for 2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or analog 2-channel
sources.
7XM HD Surround can be selected only with the XM input.

Listening to your system 06
63
en
Using the Home THX modes
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like
what you hear in a cinema.
Different THX options will be available depending on the
source and the setting for surround back channel
processing (see Using surround back channel processing
on page 66 for more on this).
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
2 Press
THX
(
HOME THX
) to select a listening mode.
1
With two channel sources, press THX repeatedly to select
a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode
(see Using surround back channel processing on page 66
for an explanation of each process):
•2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA
•2 Pro Logic+THX CINEMA
•Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA
•2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC
•Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
•2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES
•THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMES 2
With multichannel sources, press THX
(
HOME THX
)
repeatedly to select from:3
•THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources4
•2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA
•THX Ultra2/Select2 CINEMA 2 – Allows you to hear
7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
•2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC
•
THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSIC 2
– This mode is suited
not only for sources recorded in Dolby Digital and DTS,
but also to all multi-channel music sources (DVD-
Audio, etc.).
•THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMES 2 – This mode is suited
to playing the sound of games.
Using the Advanced surround effects
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety
of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced
Surround modes are designed to be used with film
soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks
to see which you like.
SC-27:
Note
1 • When the function is set to TUNER, iPod/USB, PHONO, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM or SIRIUS, it is not possible to select 2 Pro Logic
IIx GAME+THX GAMES or THX Ultra2/Select2 GAME.
• The THX mode cannot be selected in the following cases:
– When headphones are plugged in.
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 88.
• When playing an SACD, 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC, Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC and THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSIC can be
selected.
• If the settings other than Front and and SW (Subwoofer) are set to NO at Speaker Setting, only THX CINEMA, THX MUSIC THX GAMES
can be selected.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIODIMMER
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
RETURN
THX
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CT RL RECEIVER
THX
2 • Ultra2 for the SC-27, Select2 for the SC-25.
• Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
3THX CINEMA, THX MUSIC and THX GAMES can be selected when surround back processing is set to SBch OFF, when there is no surround
back speaker, or when playing 6.1- and 7.1-channel sources.
4 When playing DTS-encoded sources, Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA can be selected, not THX Surround EX.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURRADV SURR

Listening to your system
06
64
en
SC-25:
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
2 Press
ADV SURR
(
ADVANCED SURROUND
)
repeatedly to select a listening mode.
1
•ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks
•DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog
•SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of
special effects
•MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from mono
soundtracks
•ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
•EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field 2
•TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both
mono and stereo TV sources
•ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games
•SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs
•CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound
•ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock
and/or pop music
•UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources
•EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers
•PHONES SURR – When listening through
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall
surround.
Tip
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is
selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the
EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 88.
Listening in stereo
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source
through just the front left and right speakers (and
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker
settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro
multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
2 While listening to a source, press
STEREO
for stereo
playback.
3
Press repeatedly to switch between:
•STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround
settings and you can still use the Midnight,
Loudness, and Tone functions.
•F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
•F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
Note
1 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup.
For more on this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 66.
• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURR mode will automatically be selected.
2 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CT RL STATUS
REMOT E
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO MENU
ADV SURR
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL RECEIVER
ADV SURR
3 The STEREO mode cannot be selected in the following cases:
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 88.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
MENU
STEREO
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CT RL STATUS
REMOT E
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO
MENU
ADV SURR
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CTRL RECEIVER
DVD
STEREO

Listening to your system 06
65
en
Using Front Stage Surround Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to
create natural surround sound effects using just the front
speakers and the subwoofer.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
2 While listening to a source, press
STEREO
to select
Front Stage Surround Advance modes.
1
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on
this.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround
sound effect directed to the center of where the front
left and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound
effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode. 2
Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the
pure analog or digital sound source.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
2 While listening to a source, press
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
(
AUTO SURR
/
ALC
/
STREAM DIRECT
) to select
the mode you want.
3
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel
display to see how the source is being processed.
Note
1 The Front Stage Surround Advance mode cannot be selected in the following cases:
– When headphones are plugged in.
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 88.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
MENU
STEREO
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO MENU
ADV SURR
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL RECEIVER
DVD
STEREO
2 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced MCACC is performed. For
more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 46.
3 The Stream Direct mode cannot be selected in the following cases:
– When headphones are plugged in (except PURE DIRECT).
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 88.
FOCUS position
(Recommended)
WIDE position
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
PGM
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO MENU
ADV SURR
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CTRL
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
HDD
RECEIVER

Listening to your system
06
66
en
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 61.
• ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode (page 61).
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual
mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay and
hi-bit/hi-sampling (SC-25 only) settings. You will hear
sources according to the number of channels in the
signal.
• PURE DIRECT – Analog sources are heard without
any digital processing. 1 No sound is output from the
Speaker B in this mode.
• OPTIMUM SURR – Listening in Optimum Surround
mode (page 61).
Using surround back channel
processing
• Default setting: SBch ON
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back
channel will be generated, but the material may sound
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround
back channel processing off).
• With a 7.1-channel surround system, audio signals
that have undergone matrix decoding processing
through surround back channel processing to which
the Up Mix function is added are output from the
surround back speakers.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
2 Press
SBch
repeatedly to cycle the surround back
channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• SBch ON –
Matrix decoding processing for
generating the surround back component from the
surround component is turned on.
• SBch AUTO – Matrix decoding processing for
generating the surround back component from the
surround component is switched automatically.
Matrix decoding processing is only performed when
surround back channel signals are detected in the
input signals.
• SBch OFF –
Matrix decoding processing for
generating the surround back component from the
surround component is turned off.
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode
• Default setting: OFF
When you’re not using surround back speakers,
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround
back channel through your surround speakers. You can
choose to listen to sources with no surround back
channel information, or if the material sounds better in
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES. 2
• Press
SBch
repeatedly to cycle the virtual surround
back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is
switched off
Note
1 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this
is a problem.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
ENTER
CLASS
DISP
CH
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV
SURR
SBch
2 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the THX, stereo, Front
Stage Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.
•
You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the
SB
setting is set to
NO
or if
Front Bi-Amp
,
Speaker B
or ZONE 2 is selected at Surr Back System.
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.
INPUT
123
HDMI
OUT
SLEEPMCACC
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
SBch
7
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CTRL RECEIVER

Listening to your system 06
69
en
Phase Control ON
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity
• Bass sound with no loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound
reproduction through the use of phase matching 1 for an
optimal sound image at your listening position. The
default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase
Control switched on for all sound sources.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1
Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
2
Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to select
PHASE CONTROL.
The indicator on the front panel lights.
Using Full Band Phase Control
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers
connected.
Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use
generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency
bands output from a speaker system consisting of
multiple speakers (in case of typical 3-way speakers, for
instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the
woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and low-
frequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers
are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude
characteristics across wide ranges, there are cases
where the group delay characteristics are not effectively
flattened. This phase distortion of the speakers
subsequently causes group delay (the delay of low-
frequency sound against high-frequency sound) during
audio signal playback.
This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase
characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals
output from the speakers with the supplied microphone,
therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase
characteristics during audio signal playback 2 – the same
correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers.
This correction minimizes group delay between the
ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase
characteristics across all ranges.
Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase
characteristics between channels ensure better
surround sound integration for multichannel setting. 3
Note
1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough
together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper
section of the diagram above), then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE
CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also
recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher
value.
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When the MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 88.
Front speaker
Subwoofer
Sound
source
Original sound
preserved with no
loss of clarity
Listening
position
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PGM MENU
STEREO
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
RETURN
PHASE CTRL
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CTRL RECEIVER
PHASE CTRL
2 To calibrate and analyze the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, either follow the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced
MCACC (see Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 46), or set Auto MCACC menu
under Auto MCACC under Advanced MCACC to . Select Full Band Phase Ctrl ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC with Auto MCACC
menu. Upon calibration of the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, the Full Band Phase Ctrl feature is automatically switched
on. Note that FULLBAND PHASE cannot be selected unless the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers are calibrated.
3 The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed
graphically in the GUI screen (see Using Full Band Phase Control on page 69). Also, when your PC is connected to this receiver, the original
characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on
your PC (see Output PC on page 120).

Listening to your system
06
70
en
Full Band Phase Control OFF
Sound in the middle- and low-frequency ranges is
delayed against the high-frequency sound due to group
delay.
Full Band Phase Control ON
With the phase distortion corrected, the frequency-phase
characteristics are improved across all ranges.
• Sound with live dynamics
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
• Sound so accurately reproduced that you can even
hear the lip movement of the singer
• Speech heard with no loss of clarity
• Surround sound with excellent integration
SC-27:
SC-25:
1
Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode.
2
Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to select
FULLBAND PHASE.
1
Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control
functions are switched on. The FULL BAND and
indicator, on the front panel lights.
Tweeter
Midrange
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
Hz
Tweeter
Midrange
Woofer
Group Delay Characteristics
ms
Hz
Note
1 The Full Band Phase Ctrl mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When headphones are plugged in.
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 88.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
PGM MENU
STEREO
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
RETURN
PHASE CTRL
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CTRL RECEIVER
PHASE CTRL

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07
71
en
Chapter 7:
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY
inputs
Enjoying the Home Media Gallery
This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function allows you
to listen to audio files or listen to Internet radio stations
on a computer or other component connected to the
receiver’s LAN terminal. This chapter describes the
connection, setup, and playback procedures required to
enjoy these features. It is advisory that you also refer to
the operation manual supplied with your network
component.
Features of Home Media Gallery
This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you
can enjoy the following features by connecting your
components to these terminals.
• Playback the music files stored in PCs 1
You can playback a lot of musics stored in your PCs
using this unit.
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 74
and Playing back audio files stored on components on
the network on page 75.
• Listening to Internet radio stations
You can select and listen to your favorite Internet
radio station from the list of Internet radio stations
created, edited, and managed by the vTuner
database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer
products.
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 74
and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 75.
• Listening to Rhapsody, Sirius, Neural THX
internet radio or Neural Music Direct
See Listening to Rhapsody on page 77.
See Listening to Sirius Internet Radio on page 77.
See Listening to Neural Music Direct on page 77.
Steps to enjoy the Home Media Gallery
Playing back audio files on the network and
listening to Internet radio stations
1 Connect to the network through LAN interface.
See Connecting to the network through LAN interface on
page 72 for more on this.
2 Configure the network settings.
The setup is necessary only when the router to be
connected does not have the built-in DHCP server
function.
See Setting up the network on page 79 for more on this.
3 Playback with Home Media Gallery.
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 74 for
more on this.
Note
1 Besides a PC, you can also play back audio files stored on your other components with the built-in media server function based on DLNA 1.0
framework and protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks and audio systems).

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
07
72
en
Connecting to the network through
LAN interface
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
• Illustration shows the SC-27, however connections
for the SC-25 are the same except where noted.
By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN
terminal, you can play back audio files stored on
components on the network, including your PC, and
listen to Internet radio stations. 1
Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN
terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP
server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or
higher).
Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case
your router does not have the built-in DHCP server
function, it is necessary set up the network manually. For
details, see Setting up the network on page 79.
The specifications of a LAN terminal
LAN terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet jack
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Introduction
The Home Media Gallery allows you to play music on
media servers connected on an identical Local Area
Network (LAN) as the receiver. This unit allows for the
playing of files stored on the following:
• PCs running Microsoft Windows XP with Windows
Media Connect installed
• PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with
Windows Media Player 11 installed
• DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on PCs or
other components)
To play back audio files stored on components on the
network or listen to Internet radio stations, you must turn
on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your
router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it
is necessary to set up the network manually. Otherwise,
you cannot play back audio files stored on components
on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. See
Setting up the network on page 79 for more on this.
Note
1 • To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.
• Photo or video files cannot be played back.
• With Windows Media Connect or Windows Media Player 11, you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver.
LAN
(10/100) OPTICAL
RS
HDMI
COAXIAL
XM
I
R
CO
N
S
BD
IN
IN
12 V
TRI
G
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
OUT
1
OUT
2
OUT 1
OUT 2
ASSIGNABLE
31
-
(KURO
LINK )
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(CD-R)
IN
4
(VIDEO1)
IN
3
(DVR)
IN
2
(TV/SAT)
IN
1
IN
3
(VIDEO
2)
IN
2(CD)
IN
1
(DVD)
(O
U
12
V
TO
T
50
M
A
LAN
(10/100)
WAN
321
LAN
LAN cable
(sold separately)
to LAN port
Router
Modem
Internet
to LAN port
PC1 PC2

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07
73
en
About network playback
The network playback function of this unit uses the
following technologies:
Windows Media Player
See Windows Media Player 11/ Windows Media Connect
on page 83 for more on this.
Windows Media DRM
Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights Management
(WMDRM) is a platform to protect and securely deliver
content for playback on computers, portable devices and
network devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a
WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM protected
content can only be played on media servers supporting
WMDRM.
Content owners use WMDRM technology to protect their intellectual
property, including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to
access WMDRM protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to
protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content.
Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download
licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a
revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to
upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you decline an upgrade,
you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of
Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this
product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.
DLNA
DLNA CERTIFIED™ Audio Player
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-
industry organization of consumer electronics,
computing industry and mobile device companies.
Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of
digital media through a wired or wireless network in the
home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find
products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines v1.0.
When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA
compatible device is connected to this player, some
setting changes of software or other devices may be
required. Please refer to the operating instructions for
the software or device for more information.
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of
Digital Living Network Alliance.
Content playable over a network
• Even when encoded in a compatible format, some
files may not play correctly.
• Movie or Photo files cannot be played back.
• There are cases where you cannot listen to an
Internet radio station even if the station can be
selected from a list of radio stations.
• Some functions may not be supported depending on
the server type or version used.
• Supported file formats vary by server. As such, files
not supported by your server are not displayed on this
unit. For more information check with the
manufacturer of your server.
About playback behavior over a network
• Playback may stall when the PC is switched off or any
media files stored on it are deleted while playing
content.
• If there are problems within the network environment
(heavy network traffic, etc.) content may not be
displayed or played properly (playback may be
interrupted or stalled). For best performance, a
100BASE-TX connection between player and PC is
recommended.
• If several clients are playing simultaneously, as the
case may be, playback is interrupted or stalled.
• Depending on the security software installed on a
connected PC and the setting of such software,
network connection may be blocked.
Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the
player and/or the Home Media Gallery features due to
communication error/malfunctions associated with your
network connection and/or your PC, or other connected
equipment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or
Internet service provider.
“Windows Media™” is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and
cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft
Licensing, Inc.
Microsoft®, Windows®Vista, Windows®XP, Windows®2000,
Windows®Millennium Edition, Windows ®98, and WindowsNT ® are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
Authorizing this receiver
In order to be able to play with Home Media Gallery, this
receiver must be authorized. This happens automatically
when the receiver makes a connection over the network
to the PC. If not, please authorize this receiver manually
on the PC. The authorization (or permission) method for
access varies depending on the type of server currently
being connected. For more information on authorizing
this receiver, refer to the instruction manual of your
server.

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
07
74
en
Playback with Home Media Gallery
SC-27:
SC-25:
Important
• When you play back audio files, ‘Connecting...’ is
displayed before playback starts. The display may
continue for several seconds depending on the type
of file.
• In case a domain is configured in a Windows network
environment, you cannot access a PC on the network
while you are logged onto the domain. Instead of
logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine.
• There are cases where the time elapsed may not be
correctly displayed.
1
SC-27 only:
Set the remote control operation
selector switch to
SOURCE
.
2 Press
HOME MEDIA GALLERY
to select Home
Media Gallery as the input function.
It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the
network. The following screen appears when the Home
Media Gallery is selected as the input function. The
number next to indicates the number of connected
servers.
Main Zone:
Sub Zone:
The server without the mark cannot be accessed.
3 Use
/
to select the category you want to play
back, and then press
ENTER
.
Select a category from the following list:
• Internet Radio – Internet radio
• Rhapsody – Rhapsody music broadcast service
• Sirius – Internet radio that supports Sirius
• Neural Music Direct – Internet radio that supports
Neural Surround
•
Server Name
– Server components on the network
• Favorites – Favorite songs currently being registered
• Recently played – Internet Radio listening history
(most recent 20 incidents)
Depending on the selected category, the names of
folders, files, and Internet radio stations are displayed.
4 Use
/
to select the folder, music files or Internet
radio station to play back, and then press
ENTER
.
Press / to scroll up and down the list and select the
desired item. When you press ENTER, playback starts
with the playback screen being displayed for the selected
item. To return to the list screen, press RETURN. 1
• In case of a server
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
ZONE2 3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
INPUT MUTE MUTE
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
SOURCE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
MUTE
TV
CONTROL
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
123
HDMI OUT
INPUT
SELECT
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
RETURN
iPod CTRL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
ENTER
1/8
Top Menu
Internet Radio
Rhapsody
1
Sirius
Neural Music Direct
******
Favorites
Recently Played
Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Note
1 When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 10
seconds while the list screen is displayed.
[ In tern et R adio ]
[ Rh apso dy ]
[ Si rius ]
[ Ne ural Mus ic Direct ]
[ ******
]
[ Fa vori tes ]
[ Re cent ly P layed ]
[ Se tup ]
1/8
TOP MENU
** ****
Top Menu
Return
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Music1
Music2
Music3
Music4
Music5
A/V RECEIVER
4 / 8
Track Title
Server
Top Menu
Re t urn
Ra n dom On
PLAY 3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Now Playing
Album Title
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07
75
en
• In case of Internet radio
Only audio files with the mark can be played. In case of
the folders with the mark, use / and ENTER to
select the desired folder and audio files.
5 Repeat step 4 to play back the desired song.
For detailed operating instructions, refer to the section
shown below.
• Internet radio stations – See Listening to Internet
radio stations below.
• Rhapsody – See Listening to Rhapsody on page 77.
• Sirius – See Listening to Sirius Internet Radio on
page 77.
• Neural Music Direct – See Listening to Neural Music
Direct on page 77.
• Server – See Playing back audio files stored on
components on the network below.
Playing back audio files stored on
components on the network
About the playback screen
The following screen appears when you play back audio
files. Note that some items may not be displayed
depending on the type of file.
Main Zone:
Sub Zone:
You can perform the following operations with the remote
control of this receiver. Note that some buttons are not
available for operation depending on the category
currently being played back.
Listening to Internet radio stations
About Internet radio
Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service
transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of
Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services
from every corner of the world. Some are hosted,
managed, and broadcast by private individuals while
others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial
radio stations or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or
OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically
restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a
transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are
accessible from anywhere in the world, as long as there
Internet Radio
Top Menu
Return
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Folder4
A/V RECEIVER
5 / 32
Music1
Music2
Music3
Music4
Track Title
Now Playing
Channel Name
Internet Radio
Top Menu
Re t urn
Ra n dom On
PLAY 3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx
Play mode
Track title
Album title
Artist name or File name
Track Title
Server
Top Menu
Return
Random On
PLAY 3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Now Playing
Album Title
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx
Playing time
File information
Button(s) Function
Press to start playback.
If you start playback when something other than a
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that
category will play.
Pauses playback.
Stops playback.
/ Press to skip to previous/next song.
Press repeatedly to switch among Repeat One,
Repeat All and Repeat Off (available only during
playback).
Press repeatedly to switch between Random On
and Random Off (available only during playback).
/ When browsing, press to move to previous/next
levels.
DISP Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display. (If
the list screen is displayed, switch to the playback
screen.)
ENTER When browsing, press to move to next levels.
During playback, press to set the play and pause
modes.
TOP MENU Press to return to the Top Menu screen.
RETURN Press to return to the previous level.
Track Title
Random On
3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Album Title
Play
Track title
Play mode
Playing time
Artist name or File name
Album title

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
07
76
en
is a connection to the Internet, as services are not
transmitted through the air but are delivered over the
World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet
radio stations by genre as well as by region.
About the playback screen
The following screen appears when audio streams from
an Internet radio station are received.
Main Zone:
Sub Zone:
About list of Internet radio
The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is
created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database
service exclusively for use with this receiver. For details
about vTuner, see vTuner on page 82.
Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations
You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio
stations. See Advanced operations for Internet radio on
page 79 for more on this. 1
Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner
list from the special Pioneer site
With the receiver, broadcast stations not included on the
list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered and
played. Check the access code required for registration
on the receiver, use this access code to access the
special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the
desired broadcast stations in your favorites. The address
of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is:
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
1 Display the Internet Radio list screen.
To display the Internet Radio list screen, perform steps 1
to 3 at Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 74.
2 Use
/
to select ‘
Help
’, then press
ENTER
.
3 Use
/
to select ‘
Get access code
’, then press
ENTER
.
The access code required for registration on the special
Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Make a memo of
this address.
The following can be checked on the Help screen:
• Get access code – The access code required for
registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site
is displayed.
• Show Your WebID/PW – After registering on the
special Pioneer Internet radio site, the registered ID
and password are displayed.
• Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the information
registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site.
When reset, all the registered broadcast stations are
also cleared. If you want to listen to the same
stations, re-register after resetting.
Note
1 • To listen to Internet radio stations, you must have high-speed broadband Internet access. With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not enjoy
the full benefits of Internet radio.
• The port number varies depending on the Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.
• A list of Internet radio stations provided by the vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons.
• Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a radio station selected
from the list of Internet radio stations.
Play mode
Track title
Channel name
Artist name
Track Title
Now Playing
Channel Name
Internet Radio
Top Menu
Return
Random On
PLAY 3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx
Playing time
File information
Track Title
Random On
3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Channel Name
Play
Track title
Play mode
Playing time
Artist name
Channel name
Internet Radio
Top Menu
Return
Folder25
Folder26
Folder27
Folder28
Folder29
Folder30
Folder31
Help
A/V RECEIVER
32 / 32
Help
Top Menu
Return
Registration help
Get access code
Show Your WebID/PW
Reset Your WebID/PW
FAQ
A/V RECEIVER
2 / 5
Get access code
Top Menu
Return
ABC1234
A/V RECEIVER
1 / 2
access code

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07
77
en
4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from
your computer and perform the registration process.
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
Access the above site and use the access code in step 3
to perform user registration, following the instructions on
the screen.
5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your
favorites, following the instructions on the computer’s
screen.
Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list and
stations on the vTuner list can be registered. In this case
they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast
stations and can be played.
Listening to Rhapsody
About Rhapsody
Rhapsody is a paid digital music broadcast service
provided by RealNetworks. Rhapsody offers 30-day free
trial. Access the website in order to set up a trial account:
http://www.rhapsody.com/pioneer/signup
• You must have a registered account in order to listen
to songs using Rhapsody. For details, see Checking
about the Accounts on page 81.
• As of April 2009, the Rhapsody service is only offered
in the United States.
• Some functions may be changed at Rhapsody’s
discretion.
Listening to Sirius Internet Radio
Check the website below to listen to Sirius Internet Radio:
http://www.sirius.com/siriusinternetradio
• You must have a registered account in order to listen
to songs using Sirius Internet Radio. For details, see
Checking about the Accounts on page 81.
• Some functions may be changed at Sirius’s
discretion.
Listening to Neural Music Direct
About Neural Music Direct
Neural Music Direct is an Internet radio station managed
and operated by Neural THX. Neural radio stations deliver
multichannel surround sound. The Neural-THX Surround
mode is automatically selected and lets you enjoy a rich
multichannel surround sound experience. For details
about Neural THX, see the operation manual supplied
separately.
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation,
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some
jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
Playing back your favorite songs
About the Favorites folder
You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs or Internet
radio stations in the Favorites folder. Note that only the
audio files stored on components on the network can be
registered.
Registering and deleting audio files and Internet
radio stations in and from the Favorites folder
Press PGM while a song is being played back or stopped.
The selected song is then registered in the Favorites
folder.
Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be
registered.
To delete a registered song, select the Favorites folder,
select the song you want to delete from the folder, and
press CLR. The selected song is then deleted from the
Favorites folder.

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
07
78
en
About playable file formats
The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not
available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the compatibility of file formats varies depending
on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server.
Music files
Category Extension Stream
MP3 a.mp3 MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
LPCM —bLPCM Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
Channel 2 ch
WAV .wav LPCM Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
Channel 2 ch
WMA .wma WMA2/7/8 Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
WMA9 Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
AAC .m4a
.aac
.3gp
.3g2
MPEG-4 AAC LC
MPEG-4 HE AAC
(aacPlus v1/2)
Sampling frequency 32 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 16 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
FLAC .flac FLAC Sampling frequency 8 kHz, 16 kHz, 22 kHz, 32
kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit
Channel 2 ch (8-bit monaural audio
is not supported)
Bitrate —
VBR/CBR Not supported/Supported
a.“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
b.Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07
79
en
Advanced operations for Internet radio
SC-27:
SC-25:
Saving Internet radio stations
This receiver can remember the Internet radio stations
that you often listen to in seven classes (A to G) with up
to nine stations in each class to make the total of 63
stations at its maximum capacity.
Before proceeding with the following steps, check
whether you have followed Steps 2 to 4 on page 74.
1
SC-27 only:
Set the remote control operation
selector switch to
SOURCE
.
2 Tune into the Internet radio station that you want
to save.
Tune into the desired Internet radio station by following
Steps 2 to 4 on page 74.
3 Press
T.EDIT
to switch to the station-saving mode.
4 Press
CLASS
to select the class that you want to
save the station in.
Select the desired class from A to G.
5 Use
/
to select the number that you want to
save the station as, and then press ENTER.
You can also select the station number by using the
number buttons. Select the desired number from 1 to 9.
Retrieving saved Internet radio stations
You need to save Internet radio stations first before
retrieving them. If there are no Internet radio stations
currently being saved, see Saving Internet radio stations
above and save at least one Internet radio station before
proceeding with the following steps.
1
SC-27 only:
Set the remote control operation
selector switch to
SOURCE
.
2 Select the class that you want to retrieve an
Internet radio station from.
Each time you press CLASS, the class switches to A to G
in turn.
3 Use
/
to select the station number that you
want to retrieve.
You can also select the station number by using the
number buttons.
‘Preset Not Stored’ appears when you select an Internet
radio station currently not being saved.
Setting up the network
In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this
receiver is a broadband router (with the built-in DHCP
server function), simply turn on the DHCP server
function, and you will not need to set up the network
manually. You must set up the network as described
below only when you have connected this receiver to a
server without the DHCP server function. Before you set
up the network, consult with your ISP or the network
manager for the required settings. It is advisory that you
also refer to the operation manual supplied with your
network component. 1
IP Address
The IP address to be entered must be defined within the
following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond the
following ranges, you cannot play back audio files stored
on components on the network or listen to Internet radio
stations.
Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254
Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254
Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254
Subnet Mask
In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly
connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask
provided by your ISP on paper. In most of the cases, enter
255.255.255.0.
Gateway IP
In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver,
enter the corresponding IP address.
DNS Server Preferred/DNS Server Alternate
In case there is only one DNS server address provided by
your ISP on paper, enter ‘DNS Server Preferred’. In case
there are more than two DNS server addresses, enter
‘DNS Server Alternate’ in the other DNS server address
field.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
SOURCE
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
MUTE
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
T.EDIT
INFOA.ATT
CLR
SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
ENTER
CLASS
DISP
CH
ENTER
CLASS
INPUT
VOLCH
TV CONTROL
SLEEPMCACCSIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
CLASS
ENTER
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
RETURN
iPod CTRL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
ENTER
T.EDIT
Note
1 In case you make changes to the network configuration without the DHCP server function, make the corresponding changes to the network
settings of this receiver.

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
07
80
en
Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port
This setting is required when you connect this receiver to
the Internet via a proxy server. Enter the IP address of
your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also,
enter the port number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy
Port’ field.
Tip
• Press / or the numeric buttons to enter
alphanumeric characters. To delete alphanumeric
characters entered one at a time, press or
CLEAR. ‘Cancel Key Editing Lose Changes?’
appears when you press RETURN or while the
cursor is placed in the leftmost position on the
alphanumeric character entry screen. In this case,
press ENTER to cancel the editing screen, RETURN
to return to the editing screen.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1
SC-27 only:
Set the remote control operation
selector switch to
SOURCE
.
2 Press
HOME MEDIA GALLERY
to select ‘Home
Media Gallery’ as the input function.
It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the
network. The following screen appears when the Home
Media Gallery is selected as the input function.
3 Select ‘
SETUP
’ and press
ENTER
to confirm your
selection.
The SETUP screen appears.
4 Select ‘
Network Setup
’ and press
ENTER
to confirm
your selection.
The Network Setup screen appears.
5 Either ‘
Network Found
’ or ‘
No Network Found
’
appears. Check the network connection status and
press
ENTER
.
• Network Found – Connected to a component on the
network.
• No Network Found – Not connected to a
component on the network.
The Network IP Settings screen appears.
6 Select ‘
Static IP Address
’ and press
ENTER
to
confirm your selection.
The IP address screen appears. When you select
‘Automatic (DHCP)’, the network is automatically set up,
and you do not need to follow Steps 7 to 8. Proceed with
Step 9.
7 Select ‘
Change
’ and press
ENTER
to confirm your
selection.
The Edit IP address screen appears.
8 Enter the IP address.
Press / to select a number and / to move the
cursor. After you select the last number, press or
ENTER. You can also use the numeric buttons to enter a
number. The Enable Proxy Server screen appears.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
VOLCH
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
CD-R
SOURCE
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
MUTE
TV CONTROL
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT
CLR
SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
ENTER
CLASS
DISP
CH
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
123
456
789
0
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
MUTE
RETURN
iPod CTRL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VOL
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARDSTEREO
MENU
ADV SURR
CH
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
ENTER
RETURN
1/8
Top Menu
Internet Radio
Rhapsody
1
Sirius
Neural Music Direct
******
Favorites
Recently Played
Setup
A/V RECEIVER
8/8
Top Menu
Setup
Rhapsody
1
Sirius
Neural Music Direct
******
Favorites
Recently Played
Internet Radio
A/V RECEIVER
Information
Network Setup
Accounts
Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Top Menu
1 / 3
Network IP Settings
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Top Menu
Automatic (DHCP)
Static IP Address
2 / 2
IP address
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Top Menu
192.168.000.002
Change
2 / 2
Edit IP address
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Top Menu
192.168.000.002

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07
81
en
9 Select ‘
No
’ or ‘
Yes
’ for the proxy server setting to
deactivate or activate the proxy server.
In case you select ‘No’, proceed with Step 14. In case you
select ‘Yes’, on the other hand, proceed with Step 10. The
Proxy Hostname screen appears.
10 Select ‘
Change
’ and press
ENTER
to confirm your
selection.
The Edit Proxy Hostname screen appears.
11 Enter the address of your proxy server or the
domain name.
After entry, press or ENTER. The Proxy Port screen
appears.
12 Select ‘
Change
’ and press
ENTER
to confirm your
selection.
The Edit Proxy Port screen appears.
13 Enter the port number of your proxy server.
Use the numeric buttons to enter the port number. After
entry, press or ENTER. The Settings OK? screen
appears.
14 Press
ENTER
to complete the network setup
procedure.
The Top Menu screen appears.
15 Switch off the receiver.
Use RECEIVER to switch off.
Checking the network settings
You can check the following network settings of this
receiver: the MAC address, the IP address, the gateway
IP address, the proxy server, the Subnet mask, and the
firmware version (for the Home Media Gallery of this
receiver).
Before proceeding with the following steps, check
whether you have followed Steps from 1 to 3 on page 80.
1 Select ‘
Information
’ and press
ENTER
to confirm
your selection.
The Firmware Version (for the Home Media Gallery of
this receiver) screen appears.
(The version of the illustration is not the latest.)
2 Check the network settings.
Press / to switch the display. Each time you press /
, the display switches as follows.
Firmware Version MAC Address
IP address Gateway IP Proxy Server
Subnet Mask
3 Press
RETURN
.
The Setup screen appears. To return to the Top Menu
screen, press RETURN again.
Checking about the Accounts
Screen concerning Rhapsody or Sirius Internet Radio
account registration.
Before proceeding with the following steps, check
whether you have followed Steps from 1 to 3 on page 80.
1 Select
Accounts
and press
ENTER
to confirm your
selection.
2 Select
Rhapsody
or
Sirius
and press
ENTER
.
1
The contents below can be checked when Rhapsody is
selected.
• Sign in to Rhapsody (Set Account)
• Account Info
The contents below can be checked when Sirius is
selected.
• Set Account
When disposing of the product, we recommend you reset
it to delete the data. See Resetting the system on page 95.
Enable Proxy Server
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Top Menu
No
Yes
1 / 2
Proxy Hostname
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Top Menu
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv
Change
2 / 2
Edit Proxy Hostname
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Top Menu
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v
Proxy Port
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Top Menu
11111
Change
2 / 2
Edit Proxy Port
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Top Menu
11111
Note
1 Some operating procedures, etc., may be changed at the discretion of Rhapsody and Sirius.
Firmware Version
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Top Menu
X.X.XX.XXX
1 / 6

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs
07
82
en
Software update
Information on software updates may be posted on the
Pioneer website.
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
Glossary
aacPlus
AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding
Technologies. (www.codingtechnologies.com)
Default Gateway
Default Gateway is a node on a computer network that
serves as an access point to another network. A default
gateway (such as a computer and router) is used to
forward all traffic that is not addressed to a station within
the local subnet.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Server
A DHCP server is a server that allocates IP addresses to
hosts (network devices). In most cases, a broadband
router serves as a DHCP server in a home network.
DLNA
The DLNA authorized logo makes it easy for consumers
to recognize products that meet the new standard for
home network PCs and other digital devices, as set down
in the DLNA Guidelines for interoperability. This allows
music, video, etc. to be enjoyed from various devices over
a home network. This unit is compatible with music,
photo and video content, and is based on the DLNA
Home Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines v1.0.
This unit can be used to playback music, photos and
video stored on a DLNA-compatible server connected
through a LAN cable.
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is dedicated to
the simplified sharing of digital content, such as digital
music, photos and video among networked consumer
electronics (CE) and PCs. By establishing a platform of
interoperability based on open industry standards, DLNA
delivers technical design guidelines that companies can
use to develop digital home products that share content
through wired or wireless networks in the home.
DNS
DNS is an abbreviation for the Domain Name System,
which stores and associates many types of information
with domain names. Most importantly, DNS translates
domain names (computer hostnames or sitenames,
such as www.pioneerelectronics.com) to IP addresses
(such as 202.221.192.106).
Ethernet
A frame-based computer networking technology for local
area networks (LANs). This player supports 100BASE-TX
and 10BASE-T.
FLAC
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio format
allows lossless codec. Audio is compressed in FLAC
without any loss in quality. For more details about FLAC,
visit the following website: http://flac.sourceforge.net/
IP (Internet Protocol) address
A unique number that devices use in order to identify and
communicate with each other on a network utilizing the
Internet Protocol standard, such as ‘192.168.0.1’. No
duplicate numbers are allowed in the network.
LAN
LAN is an abbreviation for the Local Area Network, which
is a computer network covering a small geographical
area, like a home, office, or group of buildings. Current
LANs are most likely to be based on switched IEEE 802.3
Ethernet technology, running at 10, 100, or 1000 Mbit/s,
or on IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi technology.
MAC (Media Access Control) address
An address attached to the port of any network device
with an IP address. The MAC address is expressed as
“00:e0:36:xx:xx:xx” and cannot be changed.
Neural Surround
Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in
surround technology and has been adopted by XM
Satellite Radio, FM Radio and Neural Music Direct for
broadcasts of surround recordings and live events.

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07
83
en
Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency
domain processing which allows delivery of a more
detailed sound stage with superior localization of
surround elements. System playback is scalable from
stereo up to state-of-the-art multichannel surround.
Subnet mask
The IP address is divided into the network address part
and the host address part. The subnet mask is expressed
as ‘255.255.255.0’. In most cases, the subnet mask is
automatically assigned by the DHCP server.
vTuner
vTuner is a paid online database service that allows you
to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet.
vTuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different
countries around the globe. For more detail about
vTuner, visit the following website:
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
“This product is protected by certain intellectual property
rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such
technology outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized
subsidiary.”
Windows Media
Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media
creation and distribution for Microsoft Windows.
Windows Media is either a registered trademark or
trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or
other countries. Use an application licensed by Microsoft
Corporation to author, distribute, or play Windows Media
formatted content. Using an application unauthorized by
Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction.
Windows Media DRM
Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights
Management) service for the Windows Media platform. It
is designed to provide secure delivery of audio and/or
video content over an IP network to a PC or other
playback device in such a way that the distributor can
control how that content is used. The WMDRM-protected
content can only be played back on a component
supporting the WMDRM service.
Windows Media Player 11/
Windows Media Connect
Windows Media Connect is software to deliver music,
photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows XP
computer to home stereo systems and TVs.
With this software, you can play back files stored on the
PC through various devices wherever you like in your
home.
At this time you cannot download the Windows Media
Connect software from Microsoft’s website. If your server
currently does not have Windows Media Connect
installed, install Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows
XP) instead. This software can be downloaded from
Microsoft’s website.
For more information check the official Microsoft
website.

KURO LINK
08
84
en
Chapter 8:
KURO LINK
Important
• The procedure for setting the receiver operation
mode differs for the remote controls included with
the SC-27 and SC-25. For the SC-27’s remote control,
set the remote control operation selector switch to
RECEIVER. For the SC-25’s remote control, press the
button. When “set the remote control to
the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these
instructions, use the respective procedure described
above.
Synchronized operation with a KURO LINK-compatible
Pioneer flat panel TV or Blu-ray disc player or with a
component of another make that supports the KURO
LINK function is possible when the component is
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.
For details about concrete operations, settings, etc., refer
to the operating instructions for each component.
• You cannot use this function with components that
do not support KURO LINK.
• We do not guarantee this receiver will work with
Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible components or
components of other makes that support the KURO
LINK function. We do not guarantee that all
synchronized operations will work with components
of other makes that support the KURO LINK function.
• Use a High Speed HDMI™ cable when you want to
use the KURO LINK function. The KURO LINK
function may not work properly if a different type of
HDMI cable is used.
Making the KURO LINK connections
You can use synchronized operation for a connected flat
panel TV and up to four other components.
Be sure to connect the flat panel TV’s audio cable to the
audio input of this unit.
For details, see Connecting your TV and playback
components on page 29.
Important
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch the power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cords to the wall socket.
• After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2
second to 10 second HDMI initialization process
begins. You cannot carry out any operations during
initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit
blinks during initialization, and you can turn this
receiver on once it has stopped blinking.
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend
that you connect your HDMI component not to a flat
panel TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on
this receiver.
• To use the KURO LINK function, connect this
receiver and flat panel TV using the HDMI OUT 1
terminal. Connecting the KURO LINK compatible
component using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal may
result in malfunction. If this happens, turn off the
KURO LINK compatible component’s KURO LINK
setting.
• While the receiver is equipped with four HDMI inputs,
the KURO LINK function can only be used with up to
three DVD or Blu-ray disc players or up to three DVD
or Blu-ray disc recorders.
Cautions on the KURO LINK function
• Connect the TV directly to this receiver. Interrupting a
direct connection with other amps or an AV converter
(such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational
errors.
• Only connect components (Blu-ray disc player, etc.)
you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of
this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with
other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI
switch) can cause operational errors.
• When KURO LINK is set to ON, HDMI Input is
automatically set to OFF.
RECEIVER

KURO LINK 08
85
en
• If a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND,
ALC, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT, OPTIMUM
SURROUND or STEREO is selected while the PQLS
effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is disabled.
• When this receiver is connected by HDMI cable to a
Pioneer player that is compatible with the PQLS
function via HDMI connection and HDMI
reauthentication is performed (the HDMI indicator
blinks), the PQLS effect is enabled and the listening
mode is set to AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode
other than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, , DIRECT PURE
DIRECT, OPTIMUM SURROUND or STEREO is
selected.
• When the receiver’s KURO LINK is turned ON, even
if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is
possible to output the audio and video signals from a
player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound
from the receiver, but only when a KURO LINK-
compatible component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.) and
compatible TV are connected. In this case, the
receiver’s power turns on and the power and HDMI
indicators light.
About connections with a product of a
different brand that supports the KURO LINK
function
The synchronized operations below can be used when
the receiver’s KURO LINK function is connected to a TV
of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the KURO
LINK function. (Depending on the TV, however, some of
the KURO LINK functions may not work.)
• You can set whether to output the sound over the
speakers connected to the receiver or over the TV’s
speakers using the TV’s menu screen.
• You can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the
sound using the TV’s remote control.
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s
power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for
a component connected to the receiver by HDMI
connection is selected or when watching the TV)
• The sound of TV programs or an external input
connected to the TV can also be output from the
speakers connected to the receiver. (This requires
connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in addition
to the HDMI cable.)
The synchronized operations below can be used when
the receiver’s KURO LINK function is connected to a
player or recorder of a brand other than Pioneer that
supports the KURO LINK function.
• When playback starts on the player or recorder, the
receiver’s input switches to the HDMI input to which
that component is connected.
See the Pioneer website for the latest information on the
models of non-Pioneer brands and products that support
the KURO LINK function.
KURO LINK Setup
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as
KURO LINK-compatible connected components in order to
make use of the KURO LINK function. For more information
see the operating instructions for each component.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
Home Menu
.
2 Select ‘
System Setup
’, then press
ENTER
.
3 Select ‘
Other Setup
’, then press
ENTER
.
4 Select the ‘
KURO LINK
’ setting you want.
Choose whether to set this unit’s KURO LINK function
ON ON or OFF. You will need to set it to to use the KURO
LINK function.
When using a component that does not support the
KURO LINK function, set this to OFF.
• ON – Enables the KURO LINK function.
• OFF – The KURO LINK is disabled. Synchronized
operations cannot be used.
5 Select the ‘
Display Power Off
’ setting you want.
If the TV’s power is turned off while using the KURO LINK
function, the receiver’s power is also turned off (all power
off function). This function can be disabled.
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
ZONE2 3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
RECEIVER
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
INPUT MUTE MUTE
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
MUTE
TV
CONTROL
ENTER
RETURN
HOME
MENU
ENTER
RETURN
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
123
HDMI OUT
INPUT
SELECT
RECEIVER
SOURCE
RECEIVER
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
RETURN
iPod CTRL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
ENTER
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL RECEIVER
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6.
Remote Control Mode Setup
7.
Flicker Reduction Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
4d1.KURO LINK Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Finish
KURO LINK : ON
Display Power Off : YES

KURO LINK
08
86
en
•YES
– The all power off function is enabled. The
receiver’s power turns off together with the TV’s power.
This function only works when the input for a
component connected to the receiver by HDMI
connection is selected or when watching the TV.
•NO – The all power off function is disabled. The
receiver’s power is not affected when the TV’s power
is turned off.
6 When you’re finished, press
HOME MENU
.
You will finish to HOME MENU.
Setting the PQLS function
PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio
signal transfer control technology using the KURO LINK
function. It offers higher-quality audio playback by
controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS
compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that
has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is
generated upon transmission.
• On players compatible with PQLS Multi Surround,
PQLS works for all sources. Set the player’s audio
output to Linear PCM.
• On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio, PQLS
only works when playing CDs.
Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with
your player for more information.
This function is activated when KURO LINK is set to ON.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
PQLS
to select PQLS setting.
The setting is displayed on the front panel display.
•PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz
controller in this receiver eliminates distortion
caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best
possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use
the HDMI interface. This is valid as an HDMI function
for PQLS-compatible players.
•PQLS
OFF – PQLS is disabled.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIODIMMER
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
RETURN
PQLS
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CTRL RECEIVER
PQLS

KURO LINK 08
87
en
Before using synchronization
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you
must:
1 Put all components into standby mode.
2 Turn the power on for all components, with the
power for the flat panel TV being turned on last.
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is
connected to this receiver, and see if video output from
connected components displays properly on the screen
or not.
4 Check whether the components connected to all
HDMI inputs are properly displayed.
Synchronized amp mode
The synchronized amp mode can be set from the KURO
LINK-compatible TV’s remote control. See the
explanation below for operations in the synchronized
amp mode.
These functions are set from the TV’s menu screen. For
more information, refer to the operating instructions of
the KURO LINK-compatible TV.
Synchronized amp mode operations
When using the synchronized amp mode, the KURO
LINK-compatible component connected to the receiver
operates in sync as described below.
• The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can
be muted using the TV’s remote control.
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s
power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for
a component connected to the receiver by HDMI
connection is selected or when watching the TV)
• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the
KURO LINK-compatible component is played.
• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the
TV’s channel is switched.
• The synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if
the receiver’s input is switched to a component other
than one connected by HDMI.
The operations below can also be used on Pioneer KURO
LINK-compatible flat panel TVs.
• When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the sound
is muted, the volume status is displayed on the flat
panel TV’s screen.
• When the OSD language is switched on the flat panel
TV, the receiver’s language setting also switches
accordingly.
Canceling synchronized amp mode
• When the synchronized amp mode is canceled, the
receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an
HDMI input or a TV program on the TV.
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the
synchronized amp mode is canceled when the
receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the
synchronized amp mode back on, select the
synchronized amp mode using the TV’s remote
control.
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the
synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation
that produces sound from the TV is performed from
the TV’s menu screen, if the receiver’s HDMI output
setting is changed, etc.

Using other functions 09
89
en
About the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter)
(SC-27 only)
The SC-27 is designed for jitterless high sound quality
thanks to the combination of the SRC and a high
precision clock system.
The SRC function expands the dynamic range and
frequency bandwidth for digital audio signals. (PCM 15-
bit or compressed 20-bit audio signals are converted to
24 bits, increasing the sampling frequency for data
processing to achieve smoother, more delicate musical
expression.)
There is no setting to turn the SRC function on or off; the
SRC function is activated in all modes other than Pure
Direct with an analog input and Multi channel analog
input.
DRC
(Dynamic
Range
Control)
Adjusts the level of dynamic
range for movie soundtracks
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master
Audio (you may need to use this
feature when listening to
surround sound at low volumes).
AUTOe
MAX
MID
OFF
LFE
(LFE
Attenuate)
Some Dolby Digital and DTS
audio sources include ultra-low
bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator
as necessary to prevent the ultra-
low bass tones from distorting the
sound from the speakers.
The LFE is not limited when set to
0 dB, which is the recommended
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is
limited by the respective degree.
When OFF is selected, no sound
is output from the LFE channel.
0dB
/ –5dB/
–10dB/ –15dB/
–20dB
OFF
SACD
GAINf
Brings out detail in SACDs by
maximizing the dynamic range
(during digital processing).
0dB
+6 dB
HDMIg
(HDMI
Audio)
Specifies the routing of the HDMI
audio signal out of this receiver
(amp) or through to a TV or flat
panel TV. When THROUGH is
selected, no sound is output from
this receiver.
AMPLIFIER
THROUGH
A.DELAY
(Auto
delay)
This feature automatically
corrects the audio-to-video delay
between components connected
with an HDMI cable. The audio
delay time is set depending on the
operational status of the display
connected with an HDMI cable.
The video delay time is
automatically adjusted according
to the audio delay time.h
OFF
ON
C.WIDTHi
(Center
Width)
(Applicable
only when
using a
center
speaker)
Provides a better blend of the
front speakers by spreading the
center channel between the front
right and left speakers, making it
sound wider (higher settings) or
narrower (lower settings).
0 to 7
Default: 3
DIMENSION
i
Adjusts the depth of the surround
sound balance from front to back,
making the sound more distant
(minus settings), or more forward
(positive settings).
–3 to +3
Default: 0
PANORAMA
i
Extends the front stereo image to
include the surround speakers for
a ‘wraparound’ effect.
OFF
ON
Setting What it does Option(s)
C.IMAGEj
(Center
Image)
(Applicable
only when
using a
center
speaker)
Adjusts the center image to
create a wider stereo effect with
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0
(all center channel sent to front
right and left speakers) to 10
(center channel sent to the center
speaker only).
0 to 10
Defaults:
Neo:6 MUSIC:
3
Neo:6
CINEMA: 10
EFFECT Sets the effect level for the
currently selected Advanced
Surround or ALC mode (each
mode can be set separately).
10 to 90
Defaults: 50
(90 for
EXT.STEREO
only)
a.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light.
b.• Tone controls are disabled in THX listening modes.
• When you set the Tone Control function to ON, MIDNIGHT/
LOUDNESS is set to OFF. In the same way, when you set
MIDNIGHT/LOUDNESS to ON, the Tone Control function is set to
BYPASS.
c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
d.With the iPod/USB and HOME MEDIA GALLERY input function, by
default S.RTRV is set to ON.
e.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals.
Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.
f. You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD
discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting
back to 0 dB.
g.• HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing
synchronized amp mode operations.
• The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play
the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with
the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See Synchronized amp
mode on page 87.
h.This feature is only available when the connected display supports
the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lipsync’) for
HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set
A.DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more
details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the
manufacturer directly.
i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
j. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA
mode.
Setting What it does Option(s)

Using other functions
09
90
en
Setting the Video options
There are a number of additional picture settings you can
make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults,
if not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if an option cannot be selected on the
VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to
the current source, setting and status of the receiver.
• These functions do not affect inputs other than DVD,
TV/SAT, DVR, VIDEO1, and VIDEO2.
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
VIDEO PARAMETER
.
2 Use
/
to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
3 Use
/
to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.1
4 Press
RETURN
to confirm and exit the menu.
Note
1 • All of the setting items can be set for each input function.
• Setting items other than V.CONV can only be selected when V.CONV is set to ON.
Setting What it does Option(s)
V.CONV
(Digital Video
Conversion)
Converts video signals for output
from the MONITOR OUT jacks
(including HDMI OUT connector)
for all video types (see page 28).
ON
OFF
RESa
(Resolution)
Specifies the output resolution of
the video signal (when analog
video input signals are output at
the HDMI OUT connector, select
this according to the resolution of
your monitor and the images you
wish to watch).
AUTO
PURE
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
ASPb
(Aspect)
Specifies the aspect ratio when
analog video input signals are
output at the HDMI output. Make
your desired settings while
checking each setting on your
display (if the image doesn’t match
your monitor type, cropping or
black bands appear).
THROUGH
NORMAL
PCINEMAc,d
(PureCinema)
This setting optimizes the picture
for film material when the video
output is set to progressive.
Usually set to AUTO; but try
switching to OFF if the picture
appears unnatural.
Additionally, certain PAL movie
video (576i, 25 frames/second STB
video output or DVD disc playback,
etc.) that contain film progressive
material cannot be recognized as
such by this receiver.
AUTO
PAL
OFF
P.MOTION
c,d
(Progressive
Motion)
Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to
progressive.
–4 to +4
Default: 0
YNRcAdjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the Y
(brightness) component.
0 to +8
Default: 0
DETAILcAdjusts how sharp edges appear. –4 to +4
Default: 0
SHARPc,e
(Sharpness)
Adjusts the sharpness of the high-
frequency (detailed) elements in
the picture.
–4 to +4
Default: 0
BRIGHTc
(Brightness)
Adjusts the overall brightness. –6 to +6
Default: 0
CONTRAST
cAdjusts the contrast between light
and dark.
–6 to +6
Default: 0
HUEc,f Adjusts the red/green balance. –6 to +6
Default: 0
CHROMAc
(Chroma
Level)
Adjusts saturation from dull to
bright.
–6 to +6
Default: 0
a.• When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not
compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases no picture will
be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change
the setting.
• When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically
according to the capacity of the TV (monitor) connected by HDMI.
When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same
resolution as when input (At this time, video signals are only output
from the same type of terminals to which they were input).
• When a display is connected by HDMI, if this is set to something
other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p
signals are output from the component output terminals.
• Conversion to 1080p is only performed for 480i, 576i, 480p and
576p input signals.
b.• If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect
ratio on the source component or on the monitor.
• This cannot be set when the resolution is set to PURE.
• NORMAL setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video
signals are being input.
c.This setting is only displayed when 480i or 576i video signals are
being input.
d.This setting is only valid for component outputs.
e.This setting is not valid for HDMI outputs.
f. This setting is not displayed for component inputs.
Setting What it does Option(s)

Using other functions 09
91
en
Switching the speaker system
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 124, three speaker system settings are
possible using SPEAKERS. If you selected Normal, Front
Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your
main speaker system on or off. The options below are for
the Speaker B setting only.1
• Use
SPEAKERS
on the front panel to select a
speaker system setting.
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal, the
button will simply switch your main speaker system (A)
on or off.
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:
•SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.
•SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.
•SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).
•SP (off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as
when selecting speaker system A (above).
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust
the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-
ZONE remote controls on page 92.
1 Press
MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF
on the front panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
•ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2) sub
zone
•ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones
•ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary (ZONE 3) sub
zone
•MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE
feature off
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE
control has been switched ON.
2 Press
MULTI-ZONE CONTROL
on the front panel to
select the sub zone(s) you want.
If you selected above, you can toggle ZONE 2&3 ON
between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.
• When the receiver is on,2 make sure that any
operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and
your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this
is not showing, the front panel controls affect the
main zone only.
3 Use the
INPUT SELECTOR
dial to select the source
for the zone you have selected.
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected
to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.
• If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner controls
to select a preset station (see Saving station presets
on page 56 if you’re unsure how to do this).3
Note
1 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 124. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound
is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 124 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
PHONES
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
MULTI- ZONE
ON/OFF
MCACC
SET UP MIC
PARAMETER
ENTER
(T UNE)
(T UNE)
(PRESET )(PRESET )
AUDIO VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
USBHDMI 4
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
AUT O SURR/ALC/
ST REAM DIRE CT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREOBAND
HOME MENU RETURN
2 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.
3 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other
zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.
STANDBY/O N
INPUT
SELECTO R
PHASE
CONT RO L
ADVANCED
MCACC PQLS HD MI
MASTER
VOLUM E
PHONES
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
MULTI- ZONE
ON/OFF
MCACC
SET UP MIC
PARAMETER
ENTER
(T UNE)
(T UNE)
(PRESET )(PRESET )
AUDIO VIDEO
TUNER EDIT
USBHDMI 4
VIDEO CAMERA
iPod
iPhone
AUT O SURR/ALC/
ST REAM DIRE CT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREOBAND
HOME MENU RET URN

Using other functions
09
92
en
• When using ZONE 2 and ZONE 3, it is not possible to
use the multi-zone function to play different inputs
from among Home Media Gallery, iPod/USB, XM and
SIRIUS Radio. (It is possible to play when using the
main zone and ZONE 2 or the main zone and ZONE
3.)
4 Use the
MASTER VOLUME
dial to adjust the
volume for the zone you have selected.
This is only possible if you selected the Variable volume
control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 129.1
5 When you’re finished, press
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
again to return to the main zone controls.
You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel to switch off all output to the sub zone(s).2
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to
ZONE 2
or
ZONE
3 to operate the corresponding zone.
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE
remote controls:
Making an audio or a video recording
You can make an audio or a video recording from the
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).3
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on
page 20 for more on connections).
Since the video converter is not available when making
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder
as you used to connect your video source (the one you
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must
connect your recorder using Component video if your
source has also been connected using Component video.
For more information about video connections, see
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other video
sources on page 33.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Select the source you want to record.
Use the input function buttons (or INPUT SELECT).
• If necessary, set the remote control to the receiver
operation mode, then press SIGNAL SEL to select the
input signal corresponding to the source component
(see Choosing the input signal on page 68 for more
on this).
Note
1 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.
2 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in
standby.
Button What it does
Switches on/off power in the sub zone.
INPUT SELECT Use to select the input function in the sub
zone.
Input function
buttons
Use to select the input function directly (this
may not work for some functions) in the sub
zone.
MASTER
VOLUME +/–
(SC-25)
Use to set the listening volume in the sub
zone.
VOL +/– (SC-27)
MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it
has been muted (adjusting the volume also
restores the sound).
3 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), Video parameters and surround effects have no effect on the
recorded signal.
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.
DVD
MULTI
OPERATION
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
DVD
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
INPUT MUTE MUTE
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
CLASS
DISP
CH
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA ATTSBch
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
1 2
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
4
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CTRL RECEIVER

Using other functions 09
93
en
2 Prepare the source you want to record.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.
3 Prepare the recorder.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording
device and set the recording levels.
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set
the audio recording level automatically—check the
component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.
4 Start recording, then start playback of the source
component.
Reducing the level of an analog signal
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find
that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear
distortion in the sound.1
SC-27:
SC-25:
• Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
A.ATT
to switch the input attenuator
on or off.
Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use
the remote control to set the sleep timer.
SC-27:
SC-25:
• Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
SLEEP
repeatedly to set the sleep
time.
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will
cycle through the sleep options again.2
Dimming the display
You can choose between four brightness levels for the
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.
SC-27:
Note
1 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
PGM MENU
S O
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
ENTER
CLASS
DISP
CH
D C
A.ATT
INPUT
123
HDMI
OUT
SLEEPMCACC
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
A.ATT
8
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL RECEIVER
2 • You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.
• The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
DISP
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
SLEEP
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
SLEEP
6
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL RECEIVER
30 min 60 min
90 minOff
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
DISP
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
DIMMER

Using other functions
09
94
en
SC-25:
• Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
DIMMER
repeatedly to change the
brightness of the front panel display.
Switching the HDMI output
Set which terminal to use when outputting video and
audio signals from the HDMI output terminals (HDMI
OUT ALL, HDMI OUT 1 HDMI OUT 2 or ).
The HDMI OUT1 terminal is compatible with the KURO
LINK function.
SC-27:
SC-25:
• Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
HDMI OUT
.
Please wait a while when Please wait ... is displayed.
The output switches among
HDMI OUT ALL
,
HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 each time the button is pressed.
1
Checking your system settings
Use the status display screen to check your current
settings for features such as surround back channel
processing and your current MCACC preset.
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
STATUS
to check the system settings.
These appear on the front panel display.2
The front panel display shows each of the following
settings for three seconds each:
2 When you’re finished, press
STATUS
again to
switch off the display.
Note
1 • Synchronized amp mode on page 87 is canceled when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode, switch
to HDMI OUT 1, then select the synchronized amp mode on the flat panel TV using the flat panel TV’s remote control.
• When the power is turned off then back on after switching the HDMI output, the input is set to a setting between HDMI1 and HDMI4, or BD.
INPUT
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
DIMMER
9
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL RECEIVER
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT
CLR
SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
ENTER
CLASS
DISP
CH
HDMI OUT
TUNER XM SIRIUSiPod USB
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
3
HDMI OUT
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL RECEIVER
2 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.
Input Source
↓
Sampling Frequency
↓
Surround Back channel Processing
↓
MCACC preset
↓
ZONE 2 input
↓
ZONE 3 input
↓
KURO LINK
↓
HDMI OUT
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
PGM MENU
STEREO
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
ENTER
RETURN
STATUS
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
HDD
PGM
DVD
ANT
THX
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CTRL RECEIVER
STATUS

Using other functions 09
95
en
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.
Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF.
• Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from
the receiver beforehand.
1 Switch the receiver into standby.
2 While holding down
ENTER
on the front panel,
press
STANDBY/ON
.
The display shows RESET NO .
3 Select ‘
RESET
’ using
/
, then press
ENTER
on
the front panel.
The display shows RESET? OK.
4 Press
ENTER
to confirm.
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver
has been reset to the factory default settings.
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the
receiver is unplugged.
Default system settings
Setting Default
Digital Video Conversion ON
SPEAKERS A
Surround Back System Normal
Speaker System Front SMALL
Center SMALL
Surr SMALL
SB SMALLx2
SW YES
Crossover 80 Hz
X-Curve OFF
THX Audio Setting 4 ft<
DIMMER Brightest
Inputs
See Input function default and possible settings on page 49.
MULTI-ZONE
ZONE 2/3 Volume Level Variable
ZONE 2/3 Volume –60 dB
HDMI
HDMI Audio Amp
HDMI output HDMI OUT ALL
KURO LINK ON
DSP
Surround back channel Processing ON
Phase Control ON
Full Band Phase Control OFF
Sound Retriever iPod/USB or HOME
MEDIA GALLERY
function
ON
Other functions OFF
Sound Delay 0.0 frame
Dual Mono CH1
DRC AUTO
SACD Gain 0 dB
LFE Attenuate 0 dB
Auto delay OFF
Up Mix ON
Digital Safety OFF
Effect Level EXT.STEREO 90
Other modes 50
2 PL II Music
Options
Center Width 3
Dimension 0
Panorama OFF
Neo:6 Options Center Image Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10
All Inputs Listening Mode
(2 ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
Listening Mode
(x ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
Listening Mode (HP) STEREO
See also Setting the Audio options on page 88 for other default
DSP settings.
MCACC
MCACC Position Memory M1: MEMORY 1
Channel Level (M1 to M6) 0.0 dB
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6) 10.00 ft
Standing Wave
(M1 to M6)
Standing Wave
On/Off
ON
ATT of all channels/
filters
0.0 dB
SWch Trim 0.0 dB
EQ Data (M1 to M6) All channels/bands 0.0 dB
EQ Trim 0.0 dB
Setting Default

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-27)
10
96
en
Chapter 10:
Controlling the rest of your system
(In case of SC-27)
Important
• This section includes explanations for the SC-27’s
remote control. For instructions for the SC-25’s
remote control, see Controlling the rest of your
system (In case of SC-25) on page 103.
Operating multiple receivers
The remote control included with this receiver can be
used to operate up to three other receivers (of the same
model as this receiver) in addition to this receiver. The
receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the
preset code to set the remote control setting.
• Set the remote modes on the receivers before using
this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on
page 130).
1 Check that the remote control’s
MULTI-ZONE
selector switch is set to
MAIN
and that the operation
selector switch is set to
RECEIVER
.
2 While pressing
MULTI OPERATION
, press
HOME
MENU
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
3 Use
/
to select
RC MODE
, then press
ENTER
.
4 Use
/
to select the remote mode.
RC MODE 1 to 4 can be selected.
5 Press ENTER to set the remote mode.
The selected mode flashes for 3 seconds.
To operate another receiver, start over from step 1 to
input its preset code.
Setting the remote to control other
components
Most components can be assigned to one of the input
function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the
remote.
However, there are cases where only certain functions
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote
control will not work for the model that you are using.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the
component you want to control, you can still teach the
remote individual commands from another remote
control (see Programming signals from other remote
controls on page 97).
Note
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing
MULTI OPERATION. To go back a step, press
RETURN.
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote
automatically exits the operation.
Selecting preset codes directly
1 While pressing
MULTI OPERATION
, press
HOME
MENU
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use
/
to select
PRESET
, then press
ENTER
.
3 Press the input function button for the component
you want to control, then press
ENTER
.
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, set the
remote control operation selector switch to TV here.
The LCD on the remote displays the component you want
to control (for example DVD or TV).1
4 Use
/
to select the first letter of the brand name
of your component, then press
ENTER
.
This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P
for Pioneer).
5 Use
/
to select the manufacturer’s name from
the list, then press
ENTER
.
Note
1 You can’t assign TUNER, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS.
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
ZONE2 3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
DVD
VIDEO1
USB
CD
PHONO
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
AUDIO VIDEO
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
INPUT MUTE MUTE
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
MUTE
TV CONTROL
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
HOME
MENU

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-27) 10
97
en
6 Use
/
to select the proper code from the list,
then try using this remote with your component.
The code should start with the component type (for
example, DVD 020). If there is more than one, start with
the first one.1
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there
is one).
• If you can’t find or properly enter a preset code, you
can still teach the remote individual commands from
another remote control (see Controls the components
below).
7 If your component is controlled successfully, press
ENTER
to confirm.
The remote LCD display shows OK.
Programming signals from other
remote controls
If the preset code for your component is not available, or
the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you
can program signals from the remote control of another
component. This can also be used to program additional
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after
assigning a preset code.2
1 While pressing
MULTI OPERATION
, press
HOME
MENU
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use
/
to select
LEARNING
, then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component
you want to control (for example DVD or TV).
3 Press the input function button for the component
you want to control, then press
ENTER
.
PRES KEY blinks in the LCD display.3
4 Point the two remote controls towards each other,
then press the button that will be doing the learning on
this receiver’s remote control.
PRES KEY lights to indicate the remote is ready to accept
a signal.
• The remote controls should be 3 cm (1 inch) apart.
5 Press the corresponding button on the other
remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to
this receiver’s remote control.
For example, if you want to learn the playback control
signal, press and hold briefly. The LCD display will
show OK if the operation has been learned.
4
If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the
LCD will display ERROR briefly, and then display PRES
KEY again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching)
button as you vary the distance between the two remotes,
until the LCD display shows OK.5
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be
learned from other remote controls. The buttons
available are shown below:
Note
1 • When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please select PIONEER DVR .450, 451 or 452
• When using a Pioneer flat panel TV released prior to summer 2005, please select preset code 644.
2 The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).
3 • You can’t assign TUNER, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS.
• The TV CONTROL buttons ( and TV, TV VOL +/–, TV CH +/–, MUTE INPUT) can only be learned after the operation selection switch is set
to TV.
4 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.
5 • Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or
farther apart.
• If the remote LCD shows FULL, it means the memory is full. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings above to erase a
programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).
DVD
REC EIVE R SOUR CE
MAI N
MULT I
OP ER AT ION
AUD IOPAR AME T ER
LIST
T O O LS
VID E OPAR AME T E R
ZO N E2
SOUR CET V
REC EI VER
3
VIDEO1
iPo d
USB
MULTI CH
GALL ER Y
HOM E MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
MUTE
VOL
VOL
TV CONT ROL
CH
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD T V DVR
CD -R
3 cm (1 inch)
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
AUDIO VIDEO
ZONE2
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
INPUT MUTE MUTE
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT
CLR
SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
ENTER
CLASS
DISP
CH
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
ENTER
RETURN

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-27)
10
98
en
6 To program additional signals for the current
component repeat steps 4 and 5.
To program signals for another component, exit and
repeat steps 1 through 5.
7 Press and hold
MULTI OPERATION
for a couple of
seconds to exit and store the operation(s).
Erasing one of the remote control
button settings
This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and
restores the button to the factory default.
1 While pressing
MULTI OPERATION
, press
HOME
MENU
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use
/
to select
ERASE
, then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component
corresponding to the button setting to be erased.
3 Press the input function button corresponding to
the command to be erased, then press
ENTER
.
The LCD display flashes PRES KEY.
4 Press and hold the button to be erased for two
seconds.
The LCD display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the
button has been erased.
5 Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.
6 Press and hold
MULTI OPERATION
for a couple of
seconds when you’re done.
Resetting the remote control presets
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and
programmed buttons.1
1 While pressing
MULTI OPERATION
, press
HOME
MENU
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use
/
to select
RESET
, then press
ENTER
.
RESET flashes in the LCD display.
3 Press and hold
ENTER for about two seconds
.
The LCD shows OK to confirm the remote presets have
been erased.
Confirming preset codes
Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned
to an input function button.
1 While pressing
MULTI OPERATION
, press
HOME
MENU
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use
/
to select
READ ID
, then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the input
function button you want to check.
3 Press the button of the component for which you
want to check the preset code, then press
ENTER
.
The brand name and preset code appears in the display
for three seconds.
Renaming input function names
You can customize the names that appear on the remote
LCD when you select an input function (for example, you
could change the name of DVR to HDD/DVR).
1 While pressing
MULTI OPERATION
, press
HOME
MENU
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use
/
to select
RENAME,
then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the
input function you want to rename.
3 Press the input function button you want to
rename then press
ENTER
.
4 Use
/
to select
NAME EDT
, then press
ENTER
.
To reset the button to its original (default) name, select
NAME RST above.
5 Edit the name of the input function in the remote
control LCD, pressing
ENTER
when you’re finished.
Use / to change the character and / to move
forward/back a position. The name can be up to eight
characters (the possible characters are listed below).
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456789 \ / * + – [space]
Note
1 When Selecting preset codes directly on page 96 are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is
convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-27) 10
99
en
Direct function
• Default setting: ON
You can use the direct function feature to control one
component using the remote control while at the same
time, using your receiver to playback a different
component. This could let you, for example, use the
remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the
receiver, and then use the remote control to rewind a
tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD
player.
When direct function is on, any component you select
(using the input function buttons) will be selected by both
the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct
function off, you can operate the remote control without
affecting the receiver.
1 While pressing
MULTI OPERATION
, press
HOME
MENU
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use
/
to select
DIRECT F,
then press
ENTER
.
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the
input function you want to control.
3 Press the input function button for the component
you want to control, then press
ENTER
.
4 Use
/
to switch direct function
ON
or
OFF
, then
press
ENTER
.
The LCD shows OK to confirm the setting.
Multi Operation and System Off
The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a
series of up to 5 commands for the components in your
system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on
your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using
only two buttons on the remote control.
Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use
one button to stop and switch off a series of components
in your system at the same time.1
Programming a multi-operation or a
shutdown sequence
Set the remote control operation mode selector switch to
RECEIVER when you want to program this receiver’s
operations, to SOURCE when you want to program
operations of other components.
1 While pressing
MULTI OPERATION
, press
HOME
MENU
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.
2 Use
/
to select
MULTI OP
or
SYS OFF
from the
menu and press
ENTER
.
If you selected Multi Operation (MULTI OP), the LCD on
the remote prompts you for an input function button.
If you selected System Off (SYS OFF), go to step 4.
3 Press the input function button for the component
that will start the multi-operation, then press
ENTER
.
For example, if you want to start the sequence by
switching on your DVD player, press DVD.
4 Use
/
to select
CODE EDT
, then press
ENTER
.
To erase any previously stored multi-operations (or
shutdown sequences) select CODE ERS above.
5 Use
/
to select a command in the sequence, then
press
ENTER
.
If this is the first command in the sequence, select 1ST
CODE. Otherwise, simply choose the next command in
the sequence. PRES KEY flashes after you press ENTER.
6 If necessary, press the input function button for the
component whose command you want to input.
This is only necessary if the command is for a new
component (input function).
7 Select the button for the command you want to
input.
The following remote control commands can be selected:
Note
1 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see
Operating multiple receivers on page 103 for more on this).
• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.
• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
ZONE2 3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
DVD
VIDEO1
USB
CD
PHONO
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
INPUT MUTE MUTE
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
INPUT MUTE
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
MUTE
TV CONTROL
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
HOME
MENU

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-27)
10
100
en
• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on
or off. This is done automatically.
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:
• program the power to switch off in a shutdown
sequence (except DVD recorders);
These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).
8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 to program a sequence of up to
five commands.
9 When you’re finished, use
/
to select
EXIT
from
the menu and press
ENTER
.
You will return to the remote control Setup menu. Select
* EXIT * again to exit.
Using multi operations
You can start multi operations with the receiver switched
on, or in standby.
1 Press
MULTI OPERATION
.
MULTI OP flashes in the display.
2
Press
an input function button that has been set up
with a multi operation.
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the
programmed multi operation is performed automatically.
Using System off
1 Press
MULTI OPERATION
.
MULTI OP flashes in the display.
2 Press
SOURCE
.
The command sequence you programmed will run, then
all Pioneer components will switch off1, followed by this
receiver.
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
AUDIO VIDEO
ZONE2
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
INPUT SELECT
CD
PHONO
INPUT MUTE MUTE
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
XM
SIRIUS
IN
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS
THX PQLSMPX MEMORY
PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
PGM MENU
STEREO
SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO
INFO
DIMMER
A.ATT
CLR
SBch MCACC
HDMI OUT
D.ACCESS
ENTER
CLASS
DISP
CH
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
STANDARD ADV SURR
ENTER
RETURN
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
ZONE2 3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
CD
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
MULTI
OPERATION
Note
1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
ZONE2 3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
CD
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
MULTI
OPERATION
SOURCE

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-27) 10
101
en
Controls for TVs
This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the commands
(see Operating multiple receivers on page 103 for more on this). Set the remote control operation selector switch to
SOURCE, then press the other device operation button of the device you want to operate.
•TV CONTROL on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV operation selector switch.
Button(s) TV TV (Monitor) BD/DVD HDD/DVR VCR SAT/CATV
SOURCE POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF
Number buttons numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics
• (dot) • (dot) KURO LINK CLEAR + –
ENTER
(CLASS)
CH ENTER CH ENTER ENTER CLEAR – ENTER
EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU/
DISC NAVI
– LIST
TOOLS/GUIDE USER MENU TOOLSa
a.Controls for BD.
GUIDE – GUIDE
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / – / / /
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER – ENTER
HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU – HOME
RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN – RETURN
PGM (Red) Red Red – HDD/DVD – Red
MENU (Green) Green Green – MENU – Green
(Yellow) Yellow Yellow – VCR – Yellow
(Blue) Blue Blue MENU TV/DTV – Blue
– –
– AUTO SETUP C/
– FREEZE D/
– – A/
– –
ANT
AV SELECTION
B/
– SCREEN SIZE E/
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
DISP DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY – DISPLAY/INFO
CH +/– CH+/
-
CH+/
-
OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
+/–a
CH+/
-
CH+/
-
CH+/
-
+ – – – – – RECORD

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-27)
10
102
en
Button(s) LD TAPECD/CD-R/SACD MD/DAT
SOURCE POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF
Number buttons numerics numerics numerics –
• (dot) +10 >10/CLEAR CLEARa
a.Controls for MD.
CLEAR
ENTER
(CLASS)
ENTER DISC/ENTER – ENTER
TOP MENU – – –
–LEGATO LINKb
b.Controls for SACD.
– –
/ / / / / / – –
/
/
/
ENTER ENTER – –
–
SACD SETUP
b– –
RETURN – – –
PGM (Red) PROGRAM
(Yellow) REPEAT
(Blue) SHUFFLE
/MS–c
c.Controls for DAT.
/MS+c
AUDIO AUDIO
PURE AUDIO
a– –
DISP DISPLAY/INFO TIMEa– –
Button(s) TV (Projector)
SOURCE POWER ON
1MOVIE
2STANDARD
3DYNAMIC
4USER1
5USER2
6USER3
7COLOR+
8SHARP+
9GAMMA
0COLOR
-
• (dot) SHARP
-
ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP
EXIT
INFO
/ / / / / /
ENTER ENTER
TEST
HIDE
MENU
HDMI1
HDMI2
COMP.
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
BRIGHT
-
BRIGHT+
AUDIO POWER OFF
DISP ASPECT
CH +/– CONTRAST+/
-

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-25) 10
103
en
Controlling the rest of your system
(In case of SC-25)
Important
• This section includes explanations for the SC-25’s
remote control. For instructions for the SC-27’s
remote control, see Controlling the rest of your
system (In case of SC-27) on page 96.
Operating multiple receivers
The remote control included with this receiver can be
used to operate up to three other receivers (of the same
model as this receiver) in addition to this receiver. The
receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the
preset code to set the remote control setting.
• Set the remote modes on the receivers before using
this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on
page 130).
1 Check the operation selector switch to
MAIN
.
2 Press .
3 Press and hold
REMOTE SETUP
, then release it after
the LED flashes twice.
4 Use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit preset
code (see below).
• Receiver 1: 6 1 9 3 5 (Default)
• Receiver 2: 6 2 6 3 0
• Receiver 3: 6 2 6 3 1
• Receiver 4: 6 2 6 3 2
When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes once
to indicate that the setting is completed.
To operate another receiver, start over from step 1 to
input its preset code.
Setting the remote to control other
components
Most components can be assigned to one of the input
function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the
remote.
However, there are cases where only certain functions
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote
control will not work for the model that you are using.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the
component you want to control, you can still teach the
remote individual commands from another remote
control (see Programming signals from other remote
controls on page 104).
Note
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing
. To go back a step, press RETURN.
• After ten seconds of inactivity, the remote
automatically exits the operation.
Selecting preset codes directly
1 Press the input function button for the component
you want to control.
1
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, press TV
CTRL here.
2 Press and hold
REMOTE SETUP
, then release it after
the LED flashes twice.
3 Use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit preset
code.
See Preset code list on the separate booklet.
The LED flashes twice when the preset code has been
properly registered. When the preset code is fully input,
the LED flashes once to indicate that the setting has
failed.
INPUT
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
1 3
456
789
0
2
REMOT E
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
CH
RECEIVERTV CT RL RECEIVER
REMOT E
SETUP
MAIN
RECEIVER
Note
1 You can’t assign , TUNER, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS.
RECEIVER
RECEIVER

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-25)
10
104
en
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other components
you want to control.
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there
is one).
Programming signals from other
remote controls
If the preset code for your component is not available, or
the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you
can program signals from the remote control of another
component. This can also be used to program additional
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after
assigning a preset code.
1
1 Press and hold
REMOTE SETUP
, then release it after
the LED flashes twice.
2 Use the number buttons to enter 9, 7, 5.
The LED flashes twice.
3 Press the input function button for the component
you want to control.
2
4 Point the two remote controls towards each other,
then press the button that will be doing the learning on
this receiver’s remote control.
The LED flashes continuously for about 5 seconds.3
• The remote controls should be 3 cm (1 inch) apart.
5 Press the corresponding button on the other
remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to
this receiver’s remote control.
For example, if you want to learn the playback control
signal, press and hold briefly. If the LED flashes twice
then turns off, this indicates that learning has been
successful. If the LED only flashes once, learning has
failed.4
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be
learned from other remote controls. The buttons
available are shown below:
6 To program additional signals for the current
component repeat steps 4 and 5.
To program signals for another component, exit and
repeat steps 1 through 5.
Erasing the remote control button
settings
This erases the buttons you have programmed and
restores the button to the factory default.
1 Press and hold
REMOTE SETUP
, then release it after
the LED flashes twice.
2 Use the number buttons to enter 9, 7, 6.
The LED flashes twice.
3 Press the input function button corresponding to
the command to be erased, then press the button to be
erased twice.
To erase all the settings stored at the input function
buttons, press the input function button twice here.
The LED flashes twice to confirm the button has been
erased.
4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.
Note
1 The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).
2 • You can’t assign TUNER, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS.
• The TV CONTROL buttons (TV, TV VOL +/–, TV CH +/– and INPUT) can only be learned after the TV CTRL is pressed.
3 The learning mode is cancelled if no remote control signal is received within 5 seconds.
4 • Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.
• Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or
farther apart.
• If the LED flashes once, it means the memory is full. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings above to erase a programmed
button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).
DVD BD D VR H DM I
T V CD CD- R
T U N E R XM SIR IU S
HO ME ME DIA
GAL LE RY
iPo d USB
IN PU T
123
HD MI O UT
SLEEPMCA CC
IN PU T
SELEC T
SIG NAL SEL
456
DIM MERA .AT TSBch
789
CLA SS
MAST ER
VOL U ME
CH LEVE LD. ACC ESS
/CLR
0
ENT E R
RE CE IVER
SO UR CE
3 cm (1 inch)
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
MUTE
AUDIO
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
RECEIVER
SOURCE
VIDEO
SOURCE
123
456
789
/CLR 0ENTER
INPUT
VOLCH
TV CONTROL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
RETURN
iPod CTRL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO
MENU
ADV SURR
ENTER
ANT
THX
MULTI OPE
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
RECEIVERTV CTRL
GUIDE
TOP MENU
LIST
TOOLS
ENTER
RETURN
HOME
MENU
HDD DVD
STATUS
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
MENU

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-25) 10
105
en
Multi Operation and System Off
The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a
series of up to 32 commands for the components in your
system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on
your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using
only two buttons on the remote control.
Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use
one button to stop and switch off a series of components
in your system at the same time. The System Off feature
allows you to program a series of 5 commands for the
components in your system.1
Programming a multi-operation
1 Press and hold
REMOTE SETUP
, then release it after
the LED flashes twice.
2 Use the number buttons to enter 9, 9, 5.
The LED flashes twice.
If you selected System Off, go to step 3.
If you selected Multi Operation, go to step 4.
3 Press the
SOURCE
button.
4 Press the input function button for the component
whose command you want to input, then press the
button for the command you want to input.
For example, if you want to start the sequence by
switching on your DVD player, press DVD, then press
SOURCE.
The following remote control commands can be selected:
• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on
or off. This is done automatically.
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:
• program the power to switch off in a shutdown
sequence (except DVD recorders);
These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).
5 Repeat step 4 to program a sequence.
• A space of 250 ms can be input between commands
by pressing REMOTE SETUP between commands.
• If the LED does not light when the input function
button is pressed, this indicates that there is no
command for that input function.
Using multi operations
You can start multi operations with the receiver switched
on, or in standby.
1 Press
MULTI OPE
.
2
Press
an input function button that has been set up
with a multi operation.
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the
programmed multi operation is performed automatically.
Note
1 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see
Operating multiple receivers on page 103 for more on this).
• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.
• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
INPUT
RECEIVER
SOURCE
INPUT
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR
0
ENTER
1 3
4 65
7 8 9
0
2
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULT I OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL RECEIVER
REMOTE
SETUP
MAIN
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
MUTE
AUDIO
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
RECEIVER
SOURCE
VIDEO
SOURCE
123
456
789
/CLR 0ENTER
INPUT
VOLCH
TV CONTROL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
RETURN
iPod CTRL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO
MENU
ADV SURR
ENTER
ANT
THX
MULTI OPE
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
RECEIVERTV CTRL
GUIDE
TOP MENU
LIST
TOOLS
ENTER
RETURN
HOME
MENU
HDD DVD
STATUS
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
MENU
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
123
HDMI OUT
INPUT
SELECT
1 32
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVERTV CTRL RECEIVER
REMOTE
SETUP
MAIN

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-25)
10
106
en
Using System off
1 Press
MULTI OPE
.
2 Press
SOURCE
.
The command sequence you programmed will run, then
all Pioneer components will switch off1, followed by this
receiver.
Resetting the remote control presets
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and
programmed buttons.2
1 Check the operation selector switch to
MAIN
.
2 Press .
3 Press and hold
REMOTE SETUP
, then release it after
the LED flashes twice.
4 Use the number buttons to enter 9, 8, 1.
The LED flashes four times to indicate that the resetting
is completed.
Default preset codes
Controls the components
This remote control can control components after
entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to
control other components on page 103 for more on this).
Use the input function buttons to select the component.
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the
TV CTRL button.
Note
1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.
2 When Selecting preset codes directly on page 103 are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is
convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.
Input function button Preset code
DVD 31571
BD 32442
DVR 22306
HDMI 32442
TV 14001
CD 70468
CD-R 71087
TV CTRL 14001
61935
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
RECEIVER
SOURCE
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULTI OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL RECEIVER
REMOTE
SETUP
MAIN
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
MUTE
RETURN
iPod CTRL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
HDD
PGM
DVD
STANDARDSTEREO
MENU
ADV SURR
123
HDMI OUT
SLEEPMCACC
INPUT
SELECT
SIGNAL SEL
456
DIMMERA.ATTSBch
789
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVELD.ACCESS
/CLR 0ENTER
RECEIVER
SOURCE
ENTER
ANT
THX
MULTI OPE
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
RECEIVER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
RECEIVER
TV CTRL
SOURCE
123
456
789
/CLR 0ENTER
INPUT
VOLCH
TV CONTROL
GUIDE
TOP MENU
LIST
TOOLS
ENTER
RETURN
HOME
MENU
HDD DVD
STATUS
AUDIO
INFO
DISP
CH
MENU

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-25)
10
108
en
a. Controls for SACD.
b. Controls for MD.
Button(s) LD TAPECD/CD-R/SACD MD/DAT
SOURCE POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF
Number buttons numerics numerics numerics –
• (dot) +10 >10/CLEAR CLEARbCLEAR
ENTER
(CLASS)
ENTER DISK/ENTER
OPEN/CLOSE
bENTER
TOP MENU – – MS
–
LEGATO LINK
a– MS
/ / / / / / – –
/
/
/
ENTER ENTER – –
–
SACD SETUP
a– –
RETURN – – –
HDD (Red) PROGRAM
(Yellow) REPEAT
(Blue) SHUFFLE
AUDIO AUDIO
PURE AUDIO
a– –
DISP DISPLAY/INFO TIMEa– –
Button(s) TV (Projector)
SOURCE POWER ON
1MOVIE
2STANDARD
3DYNAMIC
4USER1
5USER2
6USER3
7COLOR+
8SHARP+
9GAMMA
0COLOR
-
• (dot) SHARP
-
ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP
EXIT
INFO
/ / / / / /
ENTER ENTER
TEST
HIDE
MENU
HDMI1
HDMI2
COMP.
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
BRIGHT
-
BRIGHT+
AUDIO POWER OFF
DISP ASPECT
CH +/– CONTRAST+/
-

The Advanced MCACC menu
11
110
en
•Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 110 for a more detailed MCACC setup. In
addition, the Full Band Phase Control function
calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the
connected speakers.
•Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see
Manual MCACC setup on page 112).
•Demo – No settings are saved and no errors occur.
When the speakers are connected to this receiver,
the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to
cancel the test tone.
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 46, you
can customize your setup options below. You can
calibrate your system differently for up to six different
MCACC presets1, which are useful if you have different
listening positions depending on the type of source (for
example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video
game close to the TV).2
Important
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved
during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
3
CAUTION
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
THX
®
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered
in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
1 Select ‘
Auto MCACC
’ from the
Advanced MCACC
menu, then press
ENTER
.
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to
Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu
on page 109.
2 Select the parameters you want to set.
Use / to select the item, then use / to set.
•Auto MCACC – The default is ALL (recommended),
but you can limit the system calibration to only one
setting (to save time) if you want.4 The available
options are ALL, Keep SP System,5 Speaker
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance, EQ Pro
& S-Wave and Full Band Phase Ctrl.
• EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC
Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines
how the frequency balance is adjusted.
After a single calibration is performed, each of the
following three correction curves can be stored
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default)
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left
and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude
characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all
the speakers are set individually so no special weighting
is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN6 sets all
speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings
(no equalization is applied to the front left and right
channels).
Note
1 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1 to MEMORY6 until you rename them in Data Management on page 121.
2 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.
3 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the Auto MCACC menu (step 2).
4 • The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when Keep SP System or EQ Pro & S-Wave is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional on page 115 for more on this.
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For
details, see Setting the Audio options on page 88.
5 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 124) unchanged.
6 If you selected ALL as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJ and FRONT
ALIGN settings.
a. Full Auto MCACC
b. Auto MCACC
c. Man ual MCACC
d. Demo
1.Advanced MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
ALL
1b.Auto MCACC
START
Exit
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro & S-Wave
Full Band Phase Ctrl
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker : NO
ALL
1b.Auto MCACC
START
Exit
A/V RECEIVER
Return
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro & S-Wave
Full Band Phase Ctrl
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker : NO
ALL
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
1b.Auto MCACC
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3
START
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro & S-Wave
THX Speaker : NO
Full Band Phase Ctrl

The Advanced MCACC menu 11
111
en
• THX Speaker (only available when the Auto MCACC
Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES
if you are using THX speakers (set all speakers to
SMALL), otherwise leave it set to NO.
• STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available when the
Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In
addition to measurements at the listening position,
you can use two more reference points for which test
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration
for several seating positions in your listening area.
1
Place the microphone at the reference point
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone
placement will be at your main listening position:
3 Connect the microphone to the
MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you
do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the
microphone.2
4 When you’re finished settings the options, select
START
then press
ENTER
.
5 Follow the instructions on-screen.
• Make sure the microphone is connected.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically
detected every time you switch on the system. Make
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
page 48 for notes regarding high background noise
levels and other possible interference.
6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish
outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This
may result in incorrect speaker settings.
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check microphone) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 48) and
verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to
be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
7 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in
the GUI screen.
3
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 8.
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a
problem with the speaker connection.
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power
and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t
seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to
select the speaker and / to change the setting
and continue.
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring
(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker
connections.4
– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power,
disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.
Note
1 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.
2 It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.
1 2
3
2nd reference
point
3rd reference
point
Main listening
position
PHO NE S
SPE AKER S
CO NT RO L
MULT I-Z ONE
ON/ OF F
MCACC
SET UP MIC
PARAMETER
ENTER
(T UNE )
(T UNE )
(PRES ET )(PRES ET )
AUDIO VIDEO
TU NER EDIT
USBHDMI 4
VIDEO CAMERA
iPo d
iPho ne
AUT O S URR /ALC /
ST REAM DIRE CT
HOME
TH X
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREOBAND
HOME MENU RET URN
3 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting from the Auto MCACC menu.
4 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective
speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.
Now Analyzing... 2/10
Environment Check
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel
Ambient Noise : OK
Microphone :
Speaker YES/NO :
L : YES
R : YES
C : YES
1b.Auto MCACC
SR : YES
SBR : YES
SBL : YES
SL : YES
SW : YES
10
OK RETRY
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel

The Advanced MCACC menu
11
112
en
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure
again.
– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and
continue.
8 Make sure ‘
OK
’ is selected, then press
ENTER
.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
• If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point setup
(in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the
2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it
at your main listening position.
9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and
the
Advanced MCACC
menu reappears automatically.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or Manual
SP Setup menu (starting on page 124).1
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check
screen:
•Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers
you’ve connected (see page 124 for more on this)
•Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker
system (see page 113 or 125 for more on this)
•Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers
from the listening position (see page 114 or 126 for
more on this)2
•Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 114 for more on this)
•Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency
balance of your speaker system based on the
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 115
for more on this)
•Group Delay – The original characteristics of group
delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted
characteristics can be displayed graphically (see
Group Delay on page 120 for more on this).
•Output PC – The data transfer mode with the
connected computer is set. The graphs of the reverb
characteristics and group delay characteristics
before and after calibration and the various MCACC
parameters can be checked (see Output PC on
page 120 for more on this).
Press RETURN after you have finished checking each
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back
to the HOME MENU.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,
you should have already completed Automatically setting
up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase
Control) on page 46.
You only need to make these settings once (unless you
change the placement of your current speaker system or
add new speakers).
CAUTION
• The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are
output at high volume.
Important
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing
HOME MENU (step 2 in Making receiver settings from
the Advanced MCACC menu on page 109).
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it
about ear level at your normal listening position.
Press HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU
before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If
the microphone is connected while the HOME
MENU is not being displayed, the display will change
to the Full Auto MCACC under Advanced MCACC.
Note
1 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with
different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 124.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend
adjusting the settings manually.
2 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal
surround sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.
Now Analyzing...
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel
Subwoofer Check :
Now Analyzing... 5/10
Surround Analysis
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel
Speaker System : OK
Channel Level :
Speaker Distance :
Standing Wave :
Reverb :
Aco Cal EQ Pro :

The Advanced MCACC menu 11
115
en
•Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where
Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting
and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the
narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted
frequency).
3 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
• Default setting: ON1/0.0dB (all channels/bands)
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room
equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your
room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that
can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’
equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the
adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)
on page 46 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 110,
you can also adjust these settings manually to get a
frequency balance that suits your tastes.2
1 Select ‘
EQ Adjust
’ from the
Manual MCACC
setup
menu.
2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your
liking.
Use / to select the channel.
Use / to select the frequency and / to boost or
cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of
the screen and press to return to Ch, then use / to
select the channel.
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until
OVER! disappears from the display.
Tip
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker
balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel
levels using test tones with the
TRIM
feature. Use
/
to select
TRIM
, then use
/
to raise or lower the
channel level for the current speaker.
3 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It
can also provide you with a graphical output of the
frequency response of your room.3
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb
characteristics, select EQ Pro & S-Wave (or ALL) for the
Auto MCACC setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 110 to calibrate the room automatically. This should
provide a balanced calibration that suits the
characteristics of your listening room.
If you still aren’t satisfied with the results, the manual
Advanced EQ Setup (below) provides a more
customized calibration of your system using the direct
sound of the speakers. This is done with the help of a
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or
using a computer (with software available from Pioneer
— see Output PC on page 120).
How to interpret the graphical output
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in
milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this
usually takes about 100 ms or so).
Note
1 You can switch on or off the Acoustic Calibration EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio options on page 88 for
more on this.
2 When EQ Adjust is selected for an MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, EQ ON is automatically
selected.
1. Fine Channel L evel
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
1c.Manual MCACC
4. EQ Adj ust
5. EQ Professional
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
6. Precision Distance
Precision Distance is only for
SC-27.
63
[Hz]
125
[Hz]
250
[Hz]
500
[Hz]
1k
[Hz]
2k
[Hz]
4k
[Hz]
8k
[Hz]
16k
[Hz]
TRIM
dB
1c4.EQ Adjust
Exit Finish
0.0Ch : L -6.0-8.0 0.0 +8.5+3.0 +8.5 0.0 0.0+3.0
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
3 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a
computer (with software available from Pioneer—see Output PC on page 120 for more on this).

The Advanced MCACC menu
11
116
en
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how
your room is responding to certain frequencies.
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are
taken into account automatically (compensation is
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency
measurements can be examined both with and without
the equalization performed by this receiver.
1
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
according to your room characteristics
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing
the time that is best for system calibration with your
particular room characteristics.
The graph below shows the difference between
conventional acoustic calibration and professional
calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the
microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of 30-50ms
to compensate for two major factors that will influence
the sound of most rooms:
•Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –
Depending on your room, you may find that lower
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the
measurement is done too late.
•Reverb characteristics for different channels –
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for
each channel. Since this difference increases as the
sound is influenced by the various room
characteristics, it is often better to capture a
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of
channel frequencies/sounds.
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often
not necessary to make a 30-50ms setting. Later time
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what
works best for your particular room.
Note that changing the room (for example, moving
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1 Select ‘
EQ Professional
’, then press
ENTER
.
2 Select an option and press
ENTER
.
•Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the
reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical
output using a PC, see Connecting a PC for Advanced
MCACC output on page 41 to connect an RS-232C
cable before selecting this option).
•Reverb View – You can check the reverb
measurements made for specified frequency ranges
in each channel.2
Note
1 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most
obvious when comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.
Level
Test tone
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Time
(in msec)
80 160
0
Level Low
frequencies
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
Time
(in msec)80 160
High
frequencies
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
0
2 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on
page 46 or Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph.
With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph
shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the
reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing
waves. If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the Reverb
Measurement function.
Level Front L
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
Time
(in msec)
80 160
Front R
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
0
1. Fine Channel L evel
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
1c.Manual MCACC
4. EQ Adj ust
5. EQ Professional
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
6. Precision Distance
Precision Distance is only for
SC-27.
a. Reverb Measurement
b. Reverb View
c. Advanced EQ Setup
1c5.EQ Professional
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return

The Advanced MCACC menu 11
117
en
•Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of
your listening area. Note that customizing system
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 46
or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 110 and is not
necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.
3 If you selected ‘
Reverb Measurement
’, select
EQ
ON
or
OFF
, and then
START
.
The following options determine how the reverb
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in
Reverb View and Output PC (see Connecting a PC for
Advanced MCACC output on page 41):
•EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area without the equalization
performed by this receiver (before calibration).
•EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area with the equalization performed
by this receiver (after calibration).1 Note that the EQ
response may not appear entirely flat due to
adjustments necessary for your listening area.
2
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select
Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 137
for troubleshooting information.
4 If you selected ‘
Reverb View
’, you can check the
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press
RETURN
when you’re done.
The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full
Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements
are conducted.3
Use / to select the channel, frequency and
calibration setting you want to check. Use / to go
back and forth between the three. The reverb
characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can
be displayed by selecting Calibration : Before / After.4
Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate
decibels in 2 dB steps.
5 If ‘
Advanced EQ Setup
’ is selected, select the
MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired
time setting for calibration, and then select
START
.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can
choose the time period that will be used for the final
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is
best to use the measurement results as a reference for
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we
recommend using the 30-50ms setting.
Use / to select the setting. Use / to switch
between them.
Select the setting from the following time periods (in
milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms, 20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-
60ms, 50-70ms 60-80ms and . This setting will be applied
to all channels during calibration.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are
given the option to check the settings on-screen.
Precision Distance
(SC-27 only)
Before using this function, perform the Full Auto MCACC
Setup procedure (see page 46). Performing the Full Auto
MCACC procedure corrects the distance to a precision of
1/2 inch, but the Precision Distance function lets you
adjust the distance to the speakers (their position) with a
precision of under 1/2 inch. Here, rather than correct the
Note
1 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset,
exit the HOME MENU and press MCACC to select it before pressing HOME MENU.
2 After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed
by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
1c5a.Reverb Measurement
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel
START
Reverb Measure with : EQ OFF
1c5b.Reverb View
Exit Return
Channel : Front M1.MEMORY 1
Calibration : After
Frequency : 63Hz
SYMMETRY
A/V RECEIVER
dB
53.0
55.0
57.0
59.0
61.0
63.0
16 kHz
8 kHz
4 kHz
2 kHz
1 kHz
500 Hz
250 Hz
125 Hz
63 Hz
0 40 80 120 160 ms
3 The After display when measurements have been made using the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC (ALL) function shows the graph for the
inferred reverb characteristics after EQ Type : SYMMETRY calibration.
4 The reverb characteristics graph is overwritten each time the reverberations are measured. No Data is displayed if there is no reverb
characteristic data, for example before measurements have been taken.
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel
START
Time Position : 30-50ms
EQ Type : SYMMETRY
STAND.WAVE Multi-P
: NO
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel
START
Time Position : 30-50ms
EQ Type : SYMMETRY
STAND.WAVE Multi-P
: NO

The Advanced MCACC menu
11
120
en
Acoustic Cal EQ
Use this to display the calibration values for the
frequency response of the various channels set in the
different MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ
Adjust on page 115 for more on this.
1 Select ‘
Acoustic Cal EQ
’ from the
MCACC Data
Check
menu.
2 When ‘
Ch
’ is highlighted, use
/
to select the
channel.
The calibration value for the frequency response of the
selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset
and its graph are displayed.
3 Press
to highlight ‘
MCACC
’, then use
/
to
select the MCACC preset you want to check.
Group Delay
Use this to display the calibrated speaker group delay
results. See Using Full Band Phase Control on page 69 for
more on this.
1 Select ‘
Group Delay
’ from the
MCACC Data Check
menu.
2 When ‘
Channel
’ is highlighted, use
/
to select
the channel you want to check.
The result of group delay calibration for the selected
channel is displayed.
When measurements have been performed with Full
Auto MCACC selected at Advanced MCACC or with ALL
or Full Band Phase Ctrl selected when Auto MCACC is
selected, the graph before group delay calibration is also
displayed.
When After is selected at Calibration, the group delay
after calibration is displayed. Compared to when Before
is selected, with After there is less difference in the delay
between frequency bands and the group delay between
the different channels is uniform, allowing you to check
the full band phase control effect.
No Data is displayed if the selected group delay has not
been measured.
Output PC
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 2
in Checking MCACC Data on page 118. The data
measured with the Advanced MCACC function is
transmitted to the connected computer. 1 The 3D graphs
of the reverb characteristics and group delay
characteristics before and after calibration and the
MCACC results (parameters) can be checked.
1 Select ‘
Output PC
’ from
MCACC Data Check
menu
and press
ENTER
.
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the
MCACC application on your PC shows on the GUI
screen.
2 Start the MCACC application on your computer.
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on
your computer. The various parameters, the reverb
characteristics and group delay characteristics data
used for display on the computer are not cleared when
the power is turned off. If the reverb characteristics are
re-measured, however, the data is overwritten. 2
3 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the MCACC Data Check menu.
Continue with other operations in the MCACC Data
Check menu if necessary. Press RETURN again to exit
the MCACC Data Check menu.
63
[Hz]
125
[Hz]
250
[Hz]
500
[Hz]
1k
[Hz]
2k
[Hz]
4k
[Hz]
8k
[Hz]
16k
[Hz]
TRIM
dB
2e.Acoustic Cal EQ
Exit Return
0.0Ch : L -6.0-8.0 0.0 +8.5+3.0 +8.5 0.0 0.0+3.0
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
2f.Group Delay
Exit Return
Channel : Front
Calibration : Before
A/V RECEIVER
ms
-1.0
-0.4
0.2
0.8
1.4
2.0
200 2k 20k Hz
Front
Center
Surr
SB
Note
1 To transmit data, the receiver and computer must be connected using an RS-232C cable and a special application must be installed on the
computer. See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 41 on page 34 for more on this.
2 Only one set of reverb characteristics is stored on the receiver. If you wish to co , transmit the mpare several different measurement results
data to the computer each time reverb measurements are taken.
Start the MCACC applicati on on your PC.
2g.Output PC
Exit Cancel
A/V RECEIVER

The Advanced MCACC menu 11
121
en
Data Management
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,
allowing you to calibrate your system for different
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the
same listening position).1 This is useful for alternate
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).
From this menu you can copy from one preset to another,
name presets for easier identification and clear any ones
you don’t need.
1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
HOME MENU
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
2 Select ‘
Data Management
’ from the
HOME MENU
.
3 Select the setting you want to adjust.
•Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets
below).
•MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC
preset data below).
•MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets
that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on
page 122).
Renaming MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re
using, you may want to rename them for easier
identification.
1 Select ‘
Memory Rename
’ from the
Data
Management
setup menu.
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then
select an appropriate preset name.
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a
preset name.
3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,
then press
RETURN
when you’re finished.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Copying MCACC preset data
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 112), we
recommend copying your current settings2 to an unused
MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will
give you a reference point from which to start.
1 Select ‘
MCACC Memory Copy
’ from the
Data
Management
setup menu.
2 Select the setting you want to copy.
•All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
•Level & Distance – Copies only the channel level and
speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC
preset memory.
3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the
settings ‘
From
’, then specify where you want to copy
them (‘
To
’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
Note
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 46 or Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 110, either of which you should have already completed.
1. Ad van ced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Ch eck
3. Data Management
4. System Setup
Exit Return
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
2 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 46 or Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 110.
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
MCACC Position Rename
M1 : MEMORY 1
3a.Memory Rename
M2 : MEMORY 2
M3 : MEMORY 3
M4 : MEMORY 4
M5 : MEMORY 5
M6 : MEMORY 6
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Finish
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
Cop y : All Data
From : M1.MEMORY 1
3b.MCACC Memory Copy
To : M1.MEMORY 1
OK
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel

The Advanced MCACC menu
11
122
en
4 Select ‘
OK
’ to confirm and copy the settings.
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES.
If NO is selected, the memory is not copied.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the
MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically
return to the Data Management setup menu.
Clearing MCACC presets
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration
settings of that preset.
1 Select ‘
MCACC Memory Clear
’ from the
Data
Management
setup menu.
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
3 Select ‘
OK
’ to confirm and clear the preset.
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES.
If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the
MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically
return to the Data Management setup menu.
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
Clear : M1.MEMORY 1
3c.MCACC Memory Clear
OK
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel

The system and the other setup 12
123
en
Chapter 12:
The system and the other setup
Important
• The procedure for setting the receiver operation
mode differs for the remote controls included with
the SC-27 and SC-25. For the SC-27’s remote control,
set the remote control operation selector switch to
RECEIVER. For the SC-25’s remote control, press the
button. When “set the remote control to
the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these
instructions, use the respective procedure described
above.
Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu
The following section describes how to change the
speaker-related settings manually and make various
other settings (input selection, OSD language selection,
etc.).
SC-27:
SC-25:
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.1
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,
disconnect them.
2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation
mode, then press
HOME MENU
.
2
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to
confirm and exit the current menu.
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME
MENU.
3 Select ‘
System Setup
’ from the
HOME MENU
, then
press
ENTER
.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
•Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of connection used
for surround back terminals and the size, number
distance and overall balance of the connected
speakers (see Manual speaker setup below).
•Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to
the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see
The Input Setup menu on page 48).
•OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display language
can be changed (see Changing the OSD display
language (OSD Language) on page 45).
•Other Setup – Changes customized settings to
reflect how you are using the receiver (see The Other
Setup menu on page 128).
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when either the HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM, SIRIUS or iPod/USB input function is selected or the
headphones are connected. When you set ZONE 2, ZONE 3 ZONE 2&3 or to ON (page 91), you can’t use the HOME MENU.
RECEIVER
DVD
RECEIVER SOURCE
MAIN
MULTI
OPERATION
ZONE2 3
VIDEO1
iPod
USB
MULTI CH
GALLERY
HOME MEDIA
CD
TUNER
VIDEO2
HDMI
BD TV DVR
CD-R
RECEIVER
SOURCE
TV
RECEIVER
VOL
VOL
TV CONTROL
CH
RECEIVER
AUDIO
PARAMETER
TOP MENU
BAND
iPod CTRL
CATEGORY
LIST
TOOLS
HOME
MENU
STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL
T.EDIT
GUIDE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TUNE
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
ENTER
RETURN
HOME
MENU
ENTER
RETURN
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER XM SIRIUS
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
iPod USB
RECEIVER
SOURCE
RECEIVER
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOP MENU
BAND
RETURN
iPod CT RL
HOME
MENU
LIST
TOOLS
CATEGORY
AUDIO
PARAMETER
ENTER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
ENTER
REMOTE
SETUP
ZONE 2
MAIN
ZONE 3
ANT
AUDIO
MULT I OPE
INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
MEMORY
CH
RECEIVER
TV CTRL RECEIVER
1. Ad van ced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Ch eck
3. Data Management
4. System Setup
Exit Return
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
a.Man ual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Lang uage
d. Other Setup
4.System Setup

The system and the other setup
12
124
en
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to
optimize the surround sound performance. You only need
to make these settings once (unless you change the
placement of your current speaker system or add new
speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your system,
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 46, it isn’t
necessary to make all of these settings.
CAUTION
• The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are
output at high volume.
1 Select ‘
Manual SP Setup
’, then press
ENTER
.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
above if you’re not already at this screen.
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
•Surr Back System – Specifies how you are using your
surround back speakers (see below).
•Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of
speakers you’ve connected (see below).
•Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your
speaker system (page 125).
•Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your
speakers from the listening position (page 126).
•X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker
system for movie soundtracks (page 126).
•THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you are
using a THX speaker setup (page 126).
3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
pressing
RETURN
to confirm after each screen.
Surround back speaker setting
• Default setting: Normal
There are several ways you can use the surround back
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a
normal home theater setup where they are used for the
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system
in another room.
1 Select ‘
Surr Back System
’ from the
Manual SP
Setup
menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 123 if you’re not already at this screen.
2 Select the surround back speaker setting.
•Normal – Select for normal home theater use with
surround back speakers in your main (speaker
system A) setup.
•Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in
another room (see Switching the speaker system on
page 91).
•Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-
amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your
speakers on page 26).
•ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals for an independent system in
another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on
page 91).
3 When ‘
Setting Change?
’ is displayed, select
Yes
.
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency)
1. It is
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 46 are
correct. Note that this setting applies to all MCACC
presets, and cannot be set independently.
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
a.Man ual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Lang uage
d. Other Setup
4.System Setup
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4a.Manual SP Setup
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Cu rve
6. THX Audi o Setting
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
Note
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4a.Manual SP Setup
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Cu rve
6. THX Audi o Setting
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
Normal
Front : Normal
4a1.Surr Back System
Center : Normal
Surr : Normal
SB : Normal
OK
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return

The system and the other setup
12
130
en
Remote Control Mode Setup
• Default setting: 1
This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent
erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver
are being used.1
1 Select ‘
Remote Control Mode Setup
’ from the
Other Setup
menu.
2 Select the
Remote Control Mode
setting you want.
3 Select “
OK
” to change the remote control mode.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the
remote control’s setting.
See Operating multiple receivers (SC-27: page 96, SC-25:
page 103).
5 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Flicker Reduction Setup
• Default setting: 4
The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased. If you feel
the GUI screen is hard to see, try changing this setting.
Note that the resolution in this setting only affects the
GUI screen; it has no influence on the video output.
1 Select ‘
Flicker Reduction Setup
’ from the
Other
Setup
menu.
2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want.
3 When you’re finished, press
RETURN
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Note
1 If you change this receiver’s setting, also change the setting on the remote control.
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6.
Remote Control Mode Setup
7.
Flicker Reduction Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
4d6.Remote Control Mode Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Cancel
Remote Control Mode : 1
OK
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Return
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6.
Remote Control Mode Setup
7.
Flicker Reduction Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
4d7.Flicker Reduction Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exit Finish
Flicker Reduction : 4

Additional information 13
131
en
Chapter 13:
Additional information
Speaker Setting Guide
In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is
important to accurately position the speakers and make
their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to
finely focus the multi-channel sound.
The three major elements in positioning the speakers are
distance, angle and orientation (the direction in which
the speakers are pointing).
Distance: The distance of all the speakers should be
equal.
Angle: The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical.
Orientation: The orientation should be horizontally
symmetrical.
In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this
environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is
possible to automatically correct the speaker distance
electrically to a precision of 1/2 inch using the Auto
MCACC Setup function (page 46) and to adjust precisely
using the procedure described at Precision Distance
(page 117). For the volume and sound quality as well,
accurate sound field correction using the equalizer and
speaker phase characteristic correction using the Full
Band Phase Control function (page 68) together make it
possible to achieve the ideal listening environment.
Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment
Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers
are steady, and leave at least 10 cm (4 inches) from the
surrounding walls. Position the speakers attentively so
that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles
from the listening position (center of the adjustments).
(We recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the
layout.) Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant
from the listening position.
Tip
• If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a
circle), use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance
correction and Fine Speaker Distance (or Precision
Distance – SC-27 only) functions to make them
equalize the distance artificially.
Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height
Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.
Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid-
and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.
If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as
the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point it
to the listening position.
Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height
of the ears.
Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation
If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same
direction, the tone will not be the same on the right and
left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced
properly. However, if all the speakers are pointed towards
the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped.
Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel Research Group
has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be
achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area
30 cm (12 inches) to 80 cm (31 inches) behind the
listening position (between the surround speakers and
the listening position).
However, the sense of sound positioning can differ
according to the conditions in the room and the speakers
being used. In smaller environments in particular (when
the front speakers are close to the listening position),
with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward.
We suggest you use this example of installation as
reference when trying out different installation methods.
Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer
Placing the subwoofer between the center and front
speakers makes even music sources sound more natural
(If there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter if it is
placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound
output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is
no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is
placed on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not
cancel out the bass sound output from the other
speakers. Also note that placing it near a wall may result
in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could
excessively amplify the bass sound.
If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at
an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This
can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but
depending on the shape of the room this could result in
standing waves. However, even if standing waves are
generated, their influence on the sound quality can be
prevented using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave
control function (page 119).
Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC
Setup (auto sound field correction) function
It is more effective to perform the Auto MCACC Setup
(page 46) (and Precision Distance (SC-27 only) on
page 117) procedure once the adjustments described
above have been completed.
Produktspecifikationer
Varumärke: | Pioneer |
Kategori: | mottagare |
Modell: | Elite SC-25 |
Behöver du hjälp?
Om du behöver hjälp med Pioneer Elite SC-25 ställ en fråga nedan och andra användare kommer att svara dig
mottagare Pioneer Manualer

22 Oktober 2024

17 Oktober 2024

10 Oktober 2024

6 Oktober 2024

22 September 2024

17 September 2024

14 September 2024

14 September 2024

10 September 2024

8 September 2024
mottagare Manualer
- mottagare Sony
- mottagare Bosch
- mottagare Brondi
- mottagare Philips
- mottagare Panasonic
- mottagare Garmin
- mottagare JVC
- mottagare JBL
- mottagare Kenwood
- mottagare Nokia
- mottagare Onkyo
- mottagare Yamaha
- mottagare Aiwa
- mottagare Akg
- mottagare Akai
- mottagare Alpine
- mottagare Advance Acoustic
- mottagare Arcam
- mottagare Ampeg
- mottagare Amplicom
- mottagare American Audio
- mottagare Amiko
- mottagare Alto
- mottagare Strong
- mottagare Hirschmann
- mottagare Audison
- mottagare Palsonic
- mottagare Nedis
- mottagare Pyle
- mottagare Audizio
- mottagare Asus
- mottagare Caliber
- mottagare Vox
- mottagare Hilti
- mottagare Renkforce
- mottagare Bush
- mottagare Sencor
- mottagare Vivanco
- mottagare Blaupunkt
- mottagare Megasat
- mottagare Meliconi
- mottagare Logitech
- mottagare Manhattan
- mottagare Exibel
- mottagare NAD
- mottagare Bowers And Wilkins
- mottagare Harman Kardon
- mottagare Audio-Technica
- mottagare Trust
- mottagare Telestar
- mottagare Crunch
- mottagare EMOS
- mottagare Sagem
- mottagare Salora
- mottagare Denver
- mottagare Tripp Lite
- mottagare Optoma
- mottagare Vision
- mottagare Genie
- mottagare Imperial
- mottagare Stinger
- mottagare Toa
- mottagare Roland
- mottagare DataVideo
- mottagare Optex
- mottagare Axis
- mottagare ART
- mottagare Hama
- mottagare Summit Audio
- mottagare Hifonics
- mottagare Musway
- mottagare Brigmton
- mottagare Denon
- mottagare Sunstech
- mottagare Vonyx
- mottagare Sennheiser
- mottagare AVM
- mottagare Elektrobock
- mottagare Chamberlain
- mottagare Avalon
- mottagare Thorens
- mottagare Velleman
- mottagare Sonance
- mottagare Smartwares
- mottagare LD Systems
- mottagare Technisat
- mottagare GoGEN
- mottagare Redline
- mottagare Rockford Fosgate
- mottagare Marquant
- mottagare Bogen
- mottagare Technics
- mottagare Fenton
- mottagare Cisco
- mottagare Krüger And Matz
- mottagare Salus
- mottagare Matrox
- mottagare Steren
- mottagare Polk
- mottagare Plantronics
- mottagare Kicker
- mottagare Bose
- mottagare IFM
- mottagare Clarion
- mottagare Mackie
- mottagare Teufel
- mottagare Marantz
- mottagare Sandberg
- mottagare Mac Audio
- mottagare Galaxy Audio
- mottagare Rega
- mottagare Pro-Ject
- mottagare Kathrein
- mottagare Belkin
- mottagare Neumann
- mottagare Denson
- mottagare RCF
- mottagare Dahua Technology
- mottagare Klipsch
- mottagare Insignia
- mottagare Renegade
- mottagare Yaesu
- mottagare Artsound
- mottagare Peavey
- mottagare MXL
- mottagare Dual
- mottagare Boss
- mottagare McIntosh
- mottagare Behringer
- mottagare PreSonus
- mottagare Roksan
- mottagare MB Quart
- mottagare Godox
- mottagare Marshall
- mottagare Electro-Voice
- mottagare Valcom
- mottagare Goobay
- mottagare Hager
- mottagare Tascam
- mottagare Focal
- mottagare Focusrite
- mottagare Auna
- mottagare Jabra
- mottagare Samson
- mottagare Maxview
- mottagare Rupert Neve Designs
- mottagare Rocketfish
- mottagare Naxa
- mottagare Shure
- mottagare Sherwood
- mottagare QTX
- mottagare Zgemma
- mottagare Konig
- mottagare Reloop
- mottagare Valueline
- mottagare Rotel
- mottagare Icom
- mottagare Chandler
- mottagare Teac
- mottagare Trevi
- mottagare RDL
- mottagare Zehnder
- mottagare Sogo
- mottagare Mx Onda
- mottagare JL Audio
- mottagare Wharfedale
- mottagare Magnat
- mottagare Chord
- mottagare Fredenstein
- mottagare Metronic
- mottagare Fiio
- mottagare Anthem
- mottagare Dynacord
- mottagare QSC
- mottagare Iriver
- mottagare Audac
- mottagare Marmitek
- mottagare Delta Dore
- mottagare Lanzar
- mottagare Hertz
- mottagare Marshall Electronics
- mottagare Hartke
- mottagare Simrad
- mottagare Jensen
- mottagare Omnitronic
- mottagare Humax
- mottagare Vaddio
- mottagare Audiolab
- mottagare Golden Age Project
- mottagare Sangean
- mottagare Apart
- mottagare Saramonic
- mottagare Line 6
- mottagare Pinnacle
- mottagare Elac
- mottagare Audio Pro
- mottagare Cambridge
- mottagare Radial Engineering
- mottagare HQ
- mottagare Homecast
- mottagare Graupner
- mottagare ATen
- mottagare Bluesound
- mottagare Integra
- mottagare Metra
- mottagare Revox
- mottagare Russound
- mottagare Comica
- mottagare Fusion
- mottagare Audient
- mottagare Geemarc
- mottagare Hegel
- mottagare Gefen
- mottagare Nexa
- mottagare Scosche
- mottagare Vivotek
- mottagare PAC
- mottagare Mooer
- mottagare Terratec
- mottagare August
- mottagare Skytec
- mottagare Luxman
- mottagare Infinity
- mottagare DBX
- mottagare JETI
- mottagare Homematic IP
- mottagare Jamo
- mottagare Kopul
- mottagare Linn
- mottagare Martin Logan
- mottagare Monitor Audio
- mottagare Monoprice
- mottagare Ibiza Sound
- mottagare Yorkville
- mottagare Axton
- mottagare Fostex
- mottagare Proel
- mottagare FBT
- mottagare MIPRO
- mottagare HQ Power
- mottagare Solid State Logic
- mottagare Tangent
- mottagare Edision
- mottagare Neets
- mottagare HiFi ROSE
- mottagare OSD Audio
- mottagare Mark Levinson
- mottagare Blackstar
- mottagare Crestron
- mottagare RME
- mottagare Black Lion Audio
- mottagare Soundstream
- mottagare Xoro
- mottagare DLS
- mottagare Adastra
- mottagare Konig & Meyer
- mottagare Block
- mottagare PSB
- mottagare Power Dynamics
- mottagare Music Hall
- mottagare Aeon Labs
- mottagare Citronic
- mottagare Mercury
- mottagare Definitive Technology
- mottagare Fender
- mottagare Formuler
- mottagare SPL
- mottagare Monacor
- mottagare Warm Audio
- mottagare Deaf Bonce
- mottagare LTC
- mottagare Logilink
- mottagare JB Systems
- mottagare Dreambox
- mottagare Zalman
- mottagare Orava
- mottagare Smart-AVI
- mottagare StarTech.com
- mottagare James
- mottagare HUMANTECHNIK
- mottagare SIIG
- mottagare PSSO
- mottagare Crest Audio
- mottagare Grace Design
- mottagare Primare
- mottagare Sonifex
- mottagare Xantech
- mottagare Kali Audio
- mottagare Audioengine
- mottagare IFi Audio
- mottagare Revel
- mottagare Ferguson
- mottagare Wet Sounds
- mottagare Televés
- mottagare Hughes & Kettner
- mottagare Manley
- mottagare Audix
- mottagare MEE Audio
- mottagare DAP Audio
- mottagare Extron
- mottagare KanexPro
- mottagare Intelix
- mottagare Ibanez
- mottagare Blustream
- mottagare SVS
- mottagare Ashly
- mottagare HEOS
- mottagare Legamaster
- mottagare Madison
- mottagare Ebode
- mottagare Medeli
- mottagare Reely
- mottagare Nubert
- mottagare Match
- mottagare Vocopro
- mottagare Xtrend
- mottagare Scansonic
- mottagare Helix
- mottagare Winegard
- mottagare Laney
- mottagare Devialet
- mottagare Universal Audio
- mottagare ETON
- mottagare Xsarius
- mottagare EA
- mottagare DirecTV
- mottagare Octagon
- mottagare Vimar
- mottagare GOgroove
- mottagare Crown
- mottagare Kogan
- mottagare Ocean Matrix
- mottagare Speco Technologies
- mottagare Kemo
- mottagare Morel
- mottagare SRS
- mottagare Avantree
- mottagare LYYT
- mottagare Antelope Audio
- mottagare CE Labs
- mottagare Panduit
- mottagare Raymarine
- mottagare REL Acoustics
- mottagare Pharos
- mottagare Accell
- mottagare Jolida
- mottagare Intertechno
- mottagare Inovonics
- mottagare Ecler
- mottagare Viscount
- mottagare Ashdown Engineering
- mottagare Naim
- mottagare Triax
- mottagare Synq
- mottagare Mtx Audio
- mottagare Ground Zero
- mottagare Aquatic AV
- mottagare Parasound
- mottagare DB Technologies
- mottagare Roswell
- mottagare Velodyne
- mottagare Epcom
- mottagare Kanto
- mottagare Sunfire
- mottagare Selfsat
- mottagare Kramer
- mottagare InLine
- mottagare Skytronic
- mottagare CYP
- mottagare Topp Pro
- mottagare AudioControl
- mottagare Cyrus
- mottagare Whistler
- mottagare Palmer
- mottagare Astell&Kern
- mottagare Karma
- mottagare TV One
- mottagare Dimavery
- mottagare AMS Neve
- mottagare Powersoft
- mottagare Cranborne Audio
- mottagare LinksPoint
- mottagare Lotronic
- mottagare Esoteric
- mottagare Markbass
- mottagare IMG Stage Line
- mottagare Wireless Solution
- mottagare Leviton
- mottagare Atlas Sound
- mottagare Aurel
- mottagare ESX
- mottagare NUVO
- mottagare Phoenix Audio
- mottagare AVPro Edge
- mottagare Comtek
- mottagare Fishman
- mottagare RetroSound
- mottagare Pyramid
- mottagare Lindy
- mottagare LEA
- mottagare Sound Ordnance
- mottagare Canyon
- mottagare FiveO
- mottagare Planet Audio
- mottagare SureCall
- mottagare Ram Audio
- mottagare Elipson
- mottagare Phonic
- mottagare Koda
- mottagare Atlona
- mottagare AVMATRIX
- mottagare Hotone
- mottagare Trace Elliot
- mottagare Bang Olufsen
- mottagare JTS
- mottagare AER
- mottagare Dynavox
- mottagare Modelcraft
- mottagare Fontastic
- mottagare Klark Teknik
- mottagare Lectrosonics
- mottagare Simaudio
- mottagare TIC
- mottagare Niles
- mottagare Knoll
- mottagare Aguilar
- mottagare Creek
- mottagare Mobile Crossing
- mottagare The T.amp
- mottagare Sound Devices
- mottagare FSR
- mottagare DAP
- mottagare Krell
- mottagare Edwards Signaling
- mottagare GigaBlue
- mottagare Vivolink
- mottagare ANKARO
- mottagare Bugera
- mottagare Alfatron
- mottagare Key Digital
- mottagare CAD Audio
- mottagare Polsen
- mottagare Whirlwind
- mottagare Cabasse
- mottagare Musical Fidelity
- mottagare Triangle
- mottagare Lab Gruppen
- mottagare Majestic
- mottagare Phoenix Gold
- mottagare Wavtech
- mottagare AmpliVox
- mottagare Audiofrog
- mottagare Memphis Audio
- mottagare CyberData Systems
- mottagare AMX
- mottagare BZBGear
- mottagare Rolls
- mottagare WyreStorm
- mottagare Williams Sound
- mottagare Rocstor
- mottagare Lyngdorf
- mottagare SoundTube
- mottagare WesAudio
- mottagare AudioSource
- mottagare Stewart
- mottagare Leema
- mottagare Apantac
- mottagare MuxLab
- mottagare Axing
- mottagare Seco-Larm
- mottagare Camille Bauer
- mottagare Mosconi
- mottagare Crest
- mottagare TechLogix Networx
- mottagare Audibax
- mottagare Classé
- mottagare Meridian
- mottagare AEA
- mottagare Quad
- mottagare Vincent
- mottagare BC Acoustique
- mottagare Gold Note
- mottagare IOTAVX
- mottagare Fosi Audio
- mottagare A-NeuVideo
- mottagare Shinybow
- mottagare S.M.S.L
- mottagare Rexing
- mottagare NuPrime
- mottagare Shanling
- mottagare Inter-M
- mottagare Sinus Live
- mottagare Soundtrack
- mottagare Canor
- mottagare C2G
- mottagare Unison Research
- mottagare Cerwin-Vega
- mottagare Universal Remote Control
- mottagare BMB
- mottagare Inateck
- mottagare Advance
- mottagare Cloud
- mottagare Lumantek
- mottagare Audiotec Fischer
- mottagare Taga Harmony
- mottagare Datapath
- mottagare Antelope
- mottagare PTN-electronics
- mottagare Clare Controls
- mottagare Loxjie
- mottagare Cayin
- mottagare Technical Pro
- mottagare VMV
- mottagare Black Hydra
- mottagare Bellari
- mottagare CSL
- mottagare Evolution
- mottagare GlobalSat
- mottagare Comprehensive
- mottagare Aplic
- mottagare PureLink
- mottagare FoneStar
- mottagare Henry Engineering
- mottagare Glemm
- mottagare ButtKicker
- mottagare Atoll
- mottagare Benchmark
- mottagare SmartSystem
- mottagare DARTS
Nyaste mottagare Manualer

19 Mars 2025

14 Mars 2025

14 Mars 2025

14 Mars 2025

13 Mars 2025

13 Mars 2025

13 Mars 2025

12 Mars 2025

11 Mars 2025

11 Mars 2025